HqPDS 2019.5.5

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 622

HQCNC

[User Manual of
Hengqiang’s
New-generation
Platemking Software]
[This software is applicable to the supporting manufacturers of

full-automatic computerized flat knitting machine control system

manufactured by Zhejiang Hengqiang Technology Co., Ltd.]


table of Contents
1 Introduction...........................................................................................................................................6
2. Software operation requirements.......................................................................................................6
3. Interface style....................................................................................................................................... 7
4. Main function modules.........................................................................................................................8
4.1 Software Installation................................................................................................................. 8
4.2 Software Registration................................................................................................................9
4.3 Drawing design........................................................................................................................ 12
4.4 File Operations......................................................................................................................... 12
4.5 pattern file type........................................................................................................................12
4.6 Automatic program generation.............................................................................................. 13
4.7 Program Data Editing.............................................................................................................. 13
4.8 Process single molding............................................................................................................ 13
4.9 Comparison with picasso1.0................................................................................................... 14
5. Toolbar (tools box).............................................................................................................................18
5.1 Toolbar icon............................................................................................................................. 19
5.1.1 Drawing Tools...............................................................................................................19
5.1.2 Zoom Tool..................................................................................................................... 68
5.1.3 Flat knitting machine tools.......................................................................................... 69
5.2 General Toolbar Icons............................................................................................................. 71
5.3 Drawing area weaving color code.......................................................................................... 96
5.4 Menu Bar.................................................................................................................................. 98
5.4.1 File Menu.......................................................................................................................98
5.4.2 Edit menu.................................................................................................................... 102
5.4.3 View menu.................................................................................................................. 102
5.4.4 Advanced menu.......................................................................................................... 104
5.4.5 Window Menu.............................................................................................................115
5.4.6 Help menu................................................................................................................... 116
5.4.7 Flat knitting machine menu.......................................................................................121
After processing.................................................................................................................... 161
5.5 context menu..........................................................................................................................180
6. Shortcuts........................................................................................................................................... 192
7. Function line drawing area, indicator bar......................................................................................196
7.1 Function Line Table............................................................................................................... 196
7.2 Partial function line operation instructions........................................................................ 210
7.2.1 Savings (l201).............................................................................................................210
7.2.2 User Macro (l202)...................................................................................................... 212
7.2.3ic/ij color code (l202)................................................................................................. 215
7.2.4 Cancel the weaving - shrink needle (l203)...............................................................219
7.2.5 blank line (l205)......................................................................................................... 228
7.2.6 degree (l207).............................................................................................................. 231
7.2.7 Shaker (l208).............................................................................................................. 232
7.2.8 speed (l209)................................................................................................................233
7.2.9 Rolling (l210)..............................................................................................................233
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

7.2.10 Weaving form (l216)................................................................................................234


7.2.11 yarn feeder (1) (l217)..............................................................................................239
7.2.12 yarn feeder (2) (l218)..............................................................................................241
7.2.13 clamping line (l219).................................................................................................242
7.2.14 start both sides, turn needle + weave (l223)......................................................... 245
7.2.15 respectively, turn the needle (l224)....................................................................... 245
7.2.16 Jacquard Tuck (l225)............................................................................................... 248
7.2.17 right line weaving (l226)......................................................................................... 250
7.2.18 left line weaving (l227)............................................................................................250
7.2.19 Bring the right line out (l228).................................................................................250
7.2.20 left line brings out (l229).........................................................................................250
7.2.21 tightly edited, loose hanging (l232)........................................................................250
7.2.22 degree 2 (l233)......................................................................................................... 250
7.2.23 raw grams 2 (l234).................................................................................................. 250
7.2.20 Forced Consolidation (l235)................................................................................... 250
8. Process single molding.....................................................................................................................251
8.1 Enter........................................................................................................................................251
8.2 Craft Order..............................................................................................................................251
8.3.1 Machine Type..............................................................................................................252
8.3.2 Starting stitches.......................................................................................................... 252
8.3.3 Starting needle offset................................................................................................. 253
8.3.4 Number of waste yarn turns......................................................................................253
8.3.5 rib rotation number................................................................................................... 253
8.3.6 ribbing......................................................................................................................... 253
8.3.7 rib transition line........................................................................................................254
8.3.8 Rib arrangement.........................................................................................................254
8.3.9 rib plus wire................................................................................................................254
8.3.10 idling height.............................................................................................................. 255
8.3.11 collar..........................................................................................................................255
8.3.12 single film..................................................................................................................259
8.3.13 needle........................................................................................................................ 259
8.3.14 left-handed needle, right-handed needle............................................................... 260
8.3.15 collar offset............................................................................................................... 260
8.3.16 large body symmetry, collar symmetry................................................................. 261
8.3.17 Retaining the pattern............................................................................................... 262
8.3.18 left and right, left and right, left and right..............................................................263
8.3.19 before falling, after the start and idling..................................................................265
8.3.20 v-neck split, v-neck pull tower summer, standard collar, v-neck shovel............ 265
8.3.21 v-neck line number.................................................................................................. 268
8.3.22 Round bottom bottom............................................................................................. 268
8.3.23 Jacquard pin..............................................................................................................269
8.3.24 pumping needle........................................................................................................269
8.3.25 display center........................................................................................................... 269
8.3.27 size.............................................................................................................................270

3
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.3.28 Inspection................................................................................................................. 271


8.3.29 contour map..............................................................................................................271
8.3.30 printing..................................................................................................................... 272
8.3.31 Scheme List............................................................................................................... 272
8.3.32 template list.............................................................................................................. 272
8.3.33 Enabling Import Templates.....................................................................................273
8.4 input........................................................................................................................................274
8.4.1 Large body craft list....................................................................................................274
8.4.2 collar craft list............................................................................................................. 282
8.4.3 Cycle Process Sheet.................................................................................................... 283
8.4.4 Right click menu......................................................................................................... 283
8.4.5 Other identifiers......................................................................................................... 284
8.4.6 Front weave, back weave, ribbing.............................................................................288
8.4.7 Mirror Copy.................................................................................................................288
8.4.8 cycle............................................................................................................................. 289
8.5 advanced parameters............................................................................................................ 290
8.5.1 front weaving..............................................................................................................290
8.5.2 post weaving............................................................................................................... 290
8.5.3 yarn feeder & number of segments...........................................................................291
8.5.4 Other............................................................................................................................294
8.6 loading and saving of process orders...................................................................................330
8.6.1 Loading Hengqiang Process Sheet............................................................................ 330
8.6.2 Loading Yijia Craft Sheet............................................................................................331
8.6.3 Loading Sakura Craft Sheet....................................................................................... 331
8.6.4 Loading the vPro process sheet................................................................................ 332
8.6.5 Loading the Kamet Craft Sheet..................................................................................334
8.7 New construction of the craft list......................................................................................... 334
8.8 Process Calculation................................................................................................................335
8.8.1 Entering process calculation..................................................................................... 335
8.8.2 Chart Description....................................................................................................... 336
8.8.3 Parameter Settings..................................................................................................... 342
9. Small picture production................................................................................................................. 346
9.1 basic small picture................................................................................................................. 347
9.2 flat small image (1)................................................................................................................ 348
9.3 flattening small map (2)........................................................................................................ 349
9.4 flat small image (3)................................................................................................................ 350
9.5 small map with offset stitch number....................................................................................351
9.6 single-sided plus jacquard thumbnail..................................................................................352
9.7 drum kit thumbnail................................................................................................................354
9.8 small picture nesting............................................................................................................. 357
9.9 Decomposition process of a nested thumbnail (example).................................................358
9.10 supports multiple thumbnails in one line......................................................................... 361
9.11 delete the expanded empty line......................................................................................... 362
9.12 small map save.....................................................................................................................363

4
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

10. Upper area and tools......................................................................................................................364


10.1 Description of the area map................................................................................................364
10.2 Upper Area Tool Description..............................................................................................365
Regional selection................................................................................................................. 365
2. Drawing area..................................................................................................................... 366
3. Regional brush adjustment............................................................................................... 366
4. Area basemap movement.................................................................................................367
5. Area padding..................................................................................................................... 367
6. Area fill copy area..............................................................................................................367
7. Area basemap color change..............................................................................................367
8. Regional adjustment......................................................................................................... 368
9. Upper grading....................................................................................................................368
10. Upper cutting.................................................................................................................. 369
11. Regional construction..................................................................................................... 370
12. Regional property settings.............................................................................................. 370
13. Upper half molding......................................................................................................... 371
10. 3 Area List Description................................................................................................. 374
11. Work area....................................................................................................................................... 377
11.3 Editing cnt............................................................................................................................ 388
11.3.1 Direct modification.................................................................................................. 388
11.3.2 Action Editing........................................................................................................... 389
11.3.3 Parameter editing.................................................................................................... 391
11.4 Working parameters........................................................................................................... 391
11.4.1 Open.......................................................................................................................... 393
11.4.2 Save........................................................................................................................... 393
11.4.3 Default....................................................................................................................... 393
11.5 module..................................................................................................................................394
11.6 Open history.........................................................................................................................395
12. Local jacquard making...................................................................................................................396
13. Pattern compilation....................................................................................................................... 406
14. Image processing............................................................................................................................460
15. Variable degree target drawing method and precautions..........................................................476
16. Beginners use................................................................................................................................. 486
17. Part of the needle diagram............................................................................................................ 498
18. Color block table.............................................................................................................................507
19. Frequently Asked Questions faq................................................................................................... 516
Precautions for converting the Appendix 000 file to the hcd file.....................................................523
Appendix II Notes on converting sin files to hcd files....................................................................... 528
Click here to enter text.

5
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

1. Introduction

Dear customers, thank you very much for using Hengqiang's new generation of
plate making software.Before installing and using the software, it is recommended
that you read this manual first to understand how to install and use the plated
software correctly.
The software has an automatic programming function, which is used to
automatically generate the lower computer control data of the computerized flat
knitting machine product, and its functions include pattern design, image analysis,
data transmission, automatic compilation and the like.

2. Software operation requirements

Operating system: Windows XP/Vista/Win7/Win10 Simplified Chinese/English.


Intel Pentium 2G Hz or AMD Anthon 2G Hz or higher.
1gb or more of memory (4gb recommended).
256mb or more hard disk space (1g recommended) for software installation.
Display: 17 inches or more (recommended resolution is 1280x800 or higher).
The computer has a usb interface.

6
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

3. interface style

The graphics operation software developed by the plate-making software on the


Microsoft Windows operating system is composed of a pull-down menu, a pop-up
menu, a toolbar menu, a main drawing area, a function line drawing area, a pointing
bar, etc., and the interface is intuitive and convenient to operate.As shown below

7
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

4. Main function module

4.1 Software Installation

 First, select the appropriate installation package in the service center of


www.hqcnc.cn of Hengqiang Company.The dongle version is for users of the
Hengqiang next-generation plate-making system dongle, and the
registration code version is for other users.The Cixing version is designed for
use by Cixing machines. For other machine users, please select the general
version.
 Use WinRar to extract the selected installation package and get a setup.exe
installation file.
 Run setup.exe until the installation is complete.
 If it is a dongle version, please install "Start -> All Programs -> Hengqiang
New Generation Plate System -> Dongle Driver".

 Run "Start -> All Programs -> Hengqiang New Generation Platemaking
System -> Database Engine".
8
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Then you can run the plate making system.If it is the version of the
registration code, the registration screen will appear for the first time, and
your registration code can be obtained by SMS.
 Please read the instruction manual "Start -> All Programs -> Hengqiang New
Generation Plate Making System -> Hengqiang New Generation Plate
Making Manual" before using for the first time. Please install the pdf reader
first.

4.2 Software Registration

The plate-making system of the 950 version registration code version needs to
be registered for the first time.
960.980 and later versions no longer need to be registered

 Registration number: Each computer will have a unique signature, and the
user will get the registration code from us according to the signature.The
registration number is an 8-digit number.
 Registration code: Enter the registration code provided by us. If the check is
passed, enter the main interface of the plate making system.Once the
registration is passed, the next time you start the system, you will no longer
need to register again.
 SMS registration: At present, we have opened the function of obtaining the
registration code through SMS.
9
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Enter the relevant SMS registration elements: name, unit, machine model.
 Click on "SMS Description" to see the information about sending a text
message.

 Please send the SMS message in the prompt to your specified number via
your mobile phone, and you will receive a registration code.The registration
code is also an 8-digit number.
 You can send up to five registration numbers simultaneously in a single
message, separated by commas.For example: "Hengqiang system,
Hengqiang, hq, 25668714, 11223344, 55667788, 99999999" and so on.
 This text message does not charge for information, you only need to pay the
relevant SMS communication fee.
 Please make sure that the content of the SMS you send is true and valid, so
as to avoid the situation where the registration code cannot be obtained.
 Click on "Mail Description" to see information about sending a message.

10
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Please send the information in the prompt as the subject of the email to the
specified registered email address, and you will receive a registration code.

The format of the Chinese mail application is as follows:

The format of the English mail application is as follows:

Affirmation:
The new version requires everyone to register again, and it is registered by SMS.
We do not charge any information fee. You only need to pay the communication fee
of Mobile, China Unicom or Telecom. The PHS can be used.
You need to provide relevant information when registering: mobile phone user
name, unit, machine (manufacturer), registration number.The information is required
11
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

to be true and valid, and the format is correct so as not to obtain the registration
code.
Click [SMS Registration] in the registration interface, and then click [SMS
Description], you can get detailed SMS description, please be careful, don't enter the
wrong SMS content.
Our company will process and reply to the correct registration SMS through a
dedicated SMS server. As long as there is no abnormal situation, SMS registration will
provide 24 hours of uninterrupted service.
Sorry, the information in the text message like "please", "trouble", "thank you",
"help" is not working, because your text message is automatically processed by the
computer.
In order to save your communication costs, there are multiple computers
registered, you can send them in one SMS, you can send up to five registration
numbers at one time, the format is as follows:
Mobile phone user name, unit, machine (manufacturer), registration number 1,
registration number 2, registration number 3, registration number 4, registration
number 5.(The information must be separated by a comma)
It is recommended that you use the mail to apply for the registration code,
because once the registration system fails, the email will be replied immediately after
the recovery, and the SMS may be lost.But please do not use gmail mailbox, the
mailbox can not be successful.
Please record it after receiving the registration code. You can use it again after
reinstalling Windows on this computer.
Finally, please do not go to Taobao or privately to buy this software from others,
including cracked version of the software.Whether it contains a Trojan virus does not
say, once the upgrade is still to register.

4.3 Drawing design

Select the drop-down menu, toolbar icon, you can easily design the design of
12
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

the pattern; the main drawing elements are: points, lines, rectangles, circles, ellipses,
diamonds, polygons, etc.; main functions are color change, array copy, linear copy ,
multiple copy, mirror copy, and so on.Various operations such as circle selection,
color filling, rotation, expansion, color replacement, deletion, cutting, and pasting
can be conveniently performed.

4.4 File Operations


Each pattern corresponds to two files, and their names are the same. The types
are different. The user only needs to care about the file name. The system
automatically saves the different attributes of the pattern (two types of files are
generated after compilation, and 1 is uncompiled). Type files); file types are *.pds,
*.hcd, etc.As long as the user chooses to save the file, the system will automatically
generate the above types of files; also if the user chooses to open the old file, the
system will automatically load the above file.

In addition, sometimes a file with the _exp suffix of the same name is
generated, which is similar to the *_exp.pds pattern, which is used when the
thumbnail is included.

4.5 pattern file type

Pds file

This file is a constant mandatory version of the pattern file, which is


automatically generated after saving. You can double-click to open it when you open
the pattern next time.
It includes pattern weaving diagram, intarsia chart, jacquard organization chart,
13
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

pattern action diagram, function line diagram, yarn feeder parking, user macro,
custom back jacquard and other information.

Hcd file

Described is a split diagram (pattern file), a shot action diagram, and loop
information for the pattern that is easily understood by the user and called by the
program control page.

Old file

The pre-expansion file saved when the pattern is expanded is used to restore
the pattern before the expansion.

995 file

File used for recovery on abnormal exit.

4.6 Automatic program generation

According to the description of the above pds file, the system can automatically
generate the hcd file required by the computer flat knitting machine. If the above
description is incomplete or ambiguous, it will prompt an error message, and will
indicate the wrong flower line number and the cause of the error. Terminate
compilation.At the same time, the flower-shaped compilation system will also detect
whether there is a collision between the front and rear needle beds.

4.7 Program Data Editing

After the user compiles the pattern smoothly, you can view the hcd action in the
pop-up menu workspace to view the effect of the split; of course, it is more
important to check whether the data of the program line is complete and accurate.
At this time, the user can use the function to pass the function. The dialog box
provided by the module function carefully checks whether the data of each program
line is accurate, such as: yarn feeder, motion, speed, degree, etc., and the user can
also modify the data in this dialog box.
Here you can also view the simulated needle-out effect diagram. The impact
14
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

diagram will also be detected in the simulation diagram. If this error occurs, please
carefully proof.

4.8 Process single molding

Users can use the process single molding function in the software to
automatically generate the required process by simply entering the process order
parameters.And automatically add basic function lines, automatic line breaks,
markers, and the flats of each stitch.

4.9 Comparison with picasso1.0

This system is developed based on picasso. Compared with the picasso1.0


version, the following functions are mainly improved and improved.
Features Description Remarks
1, drawing tools
Curves, rounded New
rectangles, diamonds,
mirror copies, borders,
stretches, shadows, clear
patches
Horizontal mirroring, modify Picasso1.0 cannot be used
vertical mirroring, rotation
Insert rows and columns, Increase batch processing
delete rows and columns and support one-time
undo recovery
hot key New Letter az selection tool
Ctrl + number selection
increase and delete lines
Partial drawing tool Support right-click Focus on improvement

15
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

extension property
settings to enrich the tool
drawing form.
2, conventional tools
Revocation, recovery modify Can undo and restore
multiple steps at once
Tip switch, center line New
switch
Color masking, color New
finding
Calculator, drawing, folder New
3, right click menu
Set the centerline New
template New Support saving and
selection;
Focus on improvement
Picture file New Support multi-value
transformation
Send all files, send the file New
on the machine
4, the color bar
hot key New Number 0-9

184-187 modify False needle color code

191-198 modify Jacquard needle

244-248 modify Twenty paragraph


249 modify Falling back and forth
5, view
Pattern modify Support small images,
focus on improvement

16
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Jacquard organization New Support different jacquard


chart backs
Pattern New Needle diagram
Zoom shortcut New Mouse wheel
Mobile shortcut New Mouse + space
6, function line diagram
L201 modify Small graphic function line
L203 modify Reduced needle
Needle
L205 modify Weaving before turning
Knitting after turning
L207 New Local jacquard
Jacquard
Degree correction
L213 New Bottom plate
L214 New Other rolls, reserved
L216 modify 81-1、2
91-1、2
72: Multicolor jacquard
121-172: Partial jacquard
Different processing
methods
Grid, custom backstage
L217 New Knotted yarn feeder
Single port lock function
line
L218 New Reset yarn feeder function
line
L219 modify Baseboard function line

17
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

L220 modify Raw grams function line


L224 modify 2x2 turning needle
Needle separation needle
First flip a needle
Automatic turning
function line
L225 modify Add a variety of hanging
forms
7, the general menu
Import New Import picasso1.0 pattern
Revocation, recovery modify No longer distinguish
between the undo and
restore of the drawing
area and the function line
area
redirect to New
Toolbar, view switch New
Language New Support for multiple
languages
Online update New Automatically detect new
versions, focus on
improvement
Update history New Recent improvements at a
glance
on modify Version number, download
center, qq service group
Advanced parameter New
settings
8, flat knitting machine menu

18
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Machine type modify Designated system


Single Process New Focus on improvement
Jacquard on the back modify Can save
Yarn feeder separation, New Focus on improvement
yarn feeder->woven form,
color filling between yarn
feeders, molding setting,
1x1 transformation,
compression separation,
sliding drawing, needle
separation, setting
separate needles,
automatic compression
blank lines, importing CNT
files, turning To the back
bed weaving, import user
macro, automatic copying
degree segment, display
yarn feeder parking point,
float yarn feeder setting,
convert to HCD file
Expand the pattern New View small image effects
Compile modify Support for compile
options;
Increase statistical
information;
Automatically transfer cnt,
pat;
Automatically display the

19
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

direction of the yarn


feeder;
9, view cnt
Read action New Automatically tune in pat
Simulation, statistics, find, New
locate, pattern, loop
Associated display New Linkage display between
patterns, patterns, cnt,
and simulations

20
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5. Toolbox

The left side of the main drawing area is the drawing toolbar, which consists of
three toolbars.They are drawing tools, zoom tools, and flat knitting tools.

21
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The drawing tools provide the tools you need to plot: frame selection, brushes,
polylines, lines, curves, rectangles, diamonds, linear copies, array copies, mirror
copies, and more.
The Zoom tool is used to zoom in, zoom out, and move the drawing area.
The flat knitting machine tool is a copy conversion tool between the drawing
area, the intarsia, and the jacquard organization chart.
26 letter keys as a shortcut to the drawing tool, you can change the default
shortcut settings by setting the shortcut function.

5.1 Toolbar icon

5.1.1 Drawing Tools

mobile
When selecting the hand shape, you can drag and move the drawing area by
pressing the left mouse button in the drawing area.It is convenient for users to
view pictures.
In other drawing tools, you can also drag and drop by long-pressing the right
mouse button.
Selecting the hand shape when the direction of the sand mouth is displayed
after the completion of the compilation can be indicated by a directional arrow
in the knitting area.As shown below

22
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Selection box
Move the cursor to the starting point of the graph and click the left mouse
button. Drag the cursor to the end point of the graph and click the left button to
end.
Set the circle selection area and use it in the function line drawing area.Select
the target circle selection area for editing (copy, paste, cut, etc.), as shown in the
following figure, where the white frame type is the circled area.To cancel the
circle, press the keyboard Esc key.
Note: The minimum circle selection range is 1 graphic unit (1 point).

23
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Double-click the selection box icon to automatically display the last selection box
that appeared before.
After the circle selection area is determined, you can directly drag and copy the
contents of the current circle selection area. If you press the Ctrl key at this time,
the cut function is achieved.

Right click attribute function:


 Directional arrow: In the case of a selection box, the pattern in the selection
box can be smoothly moved to achieve the same effect as the mouse drag.

24
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

By smoothing the movement effect, it is possible to avoid the coordinate


deviation when the mouse is dragged and positioned.
 You can also drag and drop in the horizontal or vertical direction while
dragging and copying the contents of the selection box while clicking shift
once.
 In the case of no selection box, the vertical and horizontal density of the
pattern can be set.

25
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

After setting the vertical and horizontal data, when drawing the selection
box, the width and height of the corresponding fabric will be displayed in the
selection box information.

 Support for dragging multiple views: While dragging and copying the
contents of the current view selection box, other views are also followed by
drag copy.
 Support for dragging the function line: While dragging and copying the
contents of the current view selection box, the function line also follows the
drag copy.

Irregular selection box


Click the mouse to determine the starting point of the selection box, click when
you move the cursor to another point you want, until you complete an irregular
selection box, double-click to end.

 After the selection area is determined, the content of the current circle
selection area can be directly copied and dragged. If the Ctrl key is pressed
26
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

at this time, the cutting function is achieved.


 Support color change function.
 Support for image pasting.
 Support for copying to other view features.
 Double-click the irregular selection box icon to automatically display the last
irregular selection box that appeared.
The right click properties are as follows:

 Support for dragging multiple views: While dragging and copying the current
view magic wand content, other views are also followed by drag copy.
 Support for dragging the function line: Drag and drop the colleague who copies
the contents of the current view selection box, and the function line also follows
the drag copy.

Brush (pen)
By dragging the mouse, you can freely draw points or curves with the current
color block, click once for a pixel point, hold down the left button and drag the
cursor to draw a continuous line segment, and release the left button after
reaching the target position.

Polyline
Move the cursor to the starting point, left click on the starting point of the
drawing area, drag the cursor to draw the polyline, left click once in each
position where you want the new line segment to appear, double click the left
button to end.
27
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

straight line
Move the cursor to the starting point, click the left button, drag the cursor to the
end point and click the left button to complete.If you need to cancel the current
operation, press the Esc key on the keyboard after dragging the cursor to cancel.
Once the line has been drawn, you need to use tools such as undo or delete.
Right-click attribute function: You can set the drawing style, style and thickness
of the line.You can use the right button to select the drawing tool. At this time,
the property interface of the tool will be changed. The property interface is
generally used for parameter setting or quick drawing (the same below).You can
also set the property function by clicking the right mouse button in the drawing
area and selecting the property function in the context menu (the same below).

When the option is unchecked, the line is fixed at 0, 30, 45, 60, 90
degrees.Otherwise you can paint at any angle.
You can set whether the line is solid in the style.
You can set the width of the brush.

28
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

curve
Click where the arc of the curve is located, then drag the pointer to adjust the
shape of the curve.Repeat this for the second arc.
You can set the curve mode to “two points” in the setting interface. At this time,
the drawing method is to first determine the two ends of the curve, and then
determine the middle point of the curve to draw a curve similar to the parabolic
shape.
Right-click property function: You can set the way the curve is drawn.

When the set curve mode is two points, the drawing mode is as follows:
1、 Click the left mouse button to determine the left point of the curve;
2、 Go to another point and click the left mouse button to determine the right
point of the curve;
3、 Move to the mouse again, you can see that the center point of the curve will
fall on the current mouse point, move to the appropriate position, and then
click the left mouse button to complete the curve drawing.

4、 After the drawing is completed, the next two-point curve is automatically


drawn, and if it is cancelled, the right mouse button is clicked;

29
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

When the curve mode is set to multiple points, the drawing method is as
follows:
1、 Click the left mouse button to determine the left point of the curve;
2、 Click the left mouse button to determine the second point of the curve;
3、 Click the left mouse button to determine the nth point of the curve;
4、 Double-click the left mouse button to determine the right point of the curve
and complete the curve drawing.

rectangle
Click the left mouse button to determine a vertex of the rectangle, drag the
cursor along the desired diagonal direction, and click Finish rectangle.Drag the
pointer while holding down the shift key to draw a square.
Right-click attribute function: You can output a graphic of the specified size or a
concentric drawing method.

30
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Setting the allows you to draw multiple rectangles centered on the


same point, in which case the first drawing point is required to be at the same point.

31
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Note: This attribute function can also be used for filled rectangles, rounded
rectangles, ellipses, and diamonds.

Fill rectangle
Click the left mouse button to determine a vertex of the rectangle, drag the
cursor along the desired diagonal direction, and click Finish to fill the
rectangle.Drag the pointer while holding down the shift key to draw a filled
square.

Rounded Rectangle
Click the left mouse button to determine a vertex of the rounded rectangle, drag
the cursor along the desired diagonal direction, and click to complete the
rounded rectangle.Drag the pointer while holding down the shift key to draw an
exact rounded rectangle.

Fill the rounded rectangle


Click the left mouse button to determine a vertex of the rounded rectangle, drag
the cursor along the desired diagonal direction, and click Finish to fill the
rounded rectangle.Drag the pointer while holding down the shift key to draw an
exact fill-filled rectangle.

Circle, ellipse
Click the left mouse button to determine a vertex of the circle and ellipse, drag
the cursor along the desired diagonal direction, and click to complete the circle
or ellipse.Drag the pointer while holding down the shift key to draw a standard
circle.

Filled circle, ellipse


32
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Click the left mouse button to determine the filled circle, a vertex of the ellipse,
drag the cursor along the desired diagonal direction, and click Finish Circle or
Ellipse.Drag the pointer while holding down the shift key to draw a standard
filled circle.

diamond
Click the left mouse button to determine a vertex of the diamond, drag the
cursor along the desired diagonal direction, and click Finish Diamond.Drag the
pointer while holding down the shift key to draw an exact diamond.
When the right arrow is output, the diamond shape when selecting the scale 1:2
output is more beautiful. In this case, you can input only the width or height.

Filled diamond
Click the left mouse button to determine a vertex of the filled diamond, drag the
cursor along the desired diagonal direction, and click to complete the filled
diamond.Drag the pointer while holding down the shift key to draw a precise
filled diamond.

Polyline
Click the mouse to determine a point on the polyline, and drag the cursor to
another point you want to click until you complete a polyline and double-click to
end.

Filled polyline
Click the mouse to determine a point of the filled polyline, and drag the cursor to
another point you want to click until you complete a filled polyline and
33
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

double-click to end.

Closed curve
Click the mouse to determine a point on the closed curve, and drag the cursor to
another point you want to click until you complete a closed curve and
double-click to end.

Filled closed curve


Click the mouse to determine a point of the filled closed curve, and drag the
cursor to another point you want to click until you complete a filled closed curve
and double-click to end.

Color picking
Take a certain color in the graphic as the current color block, and click to
automatically obtain the selected color of the color code of the current mouse
point.

Text
After selecting the text input, left mouse click on the drawing area will
automatically jump to the text input box.You can set the standard fonts yourself
by setting the function.As shown below

34
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Click OK when the input is complete.

Text history list: Keep the last 16 input text history for quick selection.

35
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Right-click property function: You can set the output range or mode of the text.

1、 Select [Mouse Point], and start the output text by clicking the coordinates of
the drawing area with the left mouse button as the upper left corner;
2、 Select [Select Area] to output the text to the current selection box, and the
selection box will be truncated;
3、 When you select [Paste], the text will be output by pasting. In this case, you
need to click the left mouse button again to paste the text into the drawing
area.

Straight line copy


There are two ways to do this:
1. Click on the icon and circle the copied graphic (select first, then operate).
2. Circle the copied graphic and click the icon (first action, then select).

36
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

First circle the target: circle the target graphic, left click on the icon, move the
cursor to the circle and click the left button, and drag the cursor to the desired
target area.
First select the icon: move the mouse, left click on the icon, the cursor circle
selects the copied graphic, move the cursor to the circle selection area, click the
left button, and drag the cursor to the desired target area.

Right-click property function: After circle the graphic you want to copy, right-click
in the drawing area and select Properties.You can choose the number and
direction of linear expansion.As shown below

37
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Array copy (Plane copy)


The array copies the graphics.
The operation method and skill are expanded in line.

Right-click attribute function: After selecting the graphic you want to copy,
right-click in the drawing area to select the direction and quantity of copying.As
shown below

38
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The offset in the up, down, left, and right directions is supported during copying.

39
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

40
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Want to know the effect of offsetting one stitch? You can try it! It is hard to
imagine the result.
41
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Multiple copy

Circle the target to be copied. Left click on the icon Click on the specified
position in the circle to drag the pattern (Quick Copy Mode) to the desired array
position. Click the left button to complete the direction definition, then left click
anywhere in the drawing area. Click and the graphic will be copied in the defined
direction, click once to copy one.
Right click attribute function:

42
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

You can know the number of copies that have been successfully copied from the
"Batch Times".
"Empty left" can clear the left area of ​ ​ the multiple copy, and "Empty right"
can clear the right area of ​ ​ the multiple copy.

Horizontal mirroring
Circle the target image, left-click on the icon and click on the circled mirror image
to achieve horizontal mirroring.As shown below
The target image must be circled first, and the icon is highlighted and activated.

43
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Right-click property function, you can set the color code to be automatically
converted when mirroring.If you do not need a conversion, cancel the "Allow
mirroring" feature.

1、 Select [Allow Mirror] to mirror the specified color code.


2、 Select [Paste] to paste the mirrored image.
3、 You can set the mouse point coordinates when pasting.
4、 The color code of the image is set in pairs.
5、 Export: Save the current color code pair to a file.
6、 Import: Import color code pairs from other files.

44
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Vertical mirroring
Vertical mirroring operation is the same as horizontal mirroring, as shown below

Right-click property function, you can set the mirror image to be output by
pasting.

45
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Mirror copy
Perform image copying of the target image up, down, left, and right.
Circle the target image, move the cursor to where you need to copy, and click
the left mouse button.The image copied by the image appears on the edge side
of the cursor.As shown below
Note: The figure below shows the effect of the cursor clicking on the inside of
the dotted line.

Right-click attribute function: You can select the direction of mirror copy and the
number of mirror interval pins, and you can also set the color code conversion
processing of the image.As shown below

46
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

filling
After specifying a color patch, fill the circled area or the closed color block area.
Note: If the edges of the object to be filled are not continuous, the fill color will leak
out to the rest of the drawing area, to find and close the breakpoint.
Right-click property function: You can set the color range and mode of the fill.

Enable edge color to specify the edge of the fill area.


Area direction: Calculate the direction of the connected area, 4 means the up,
down, left and right directions, and 8 means the up, down, left, and right angles
47
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

are eight directions.


 This setting is the same parameter as the area direction in the advanced settings.
 Simultaneously hold down the shift key to force 8 directions.
 Simultaneously hold down the ctrl key to force 4 directions.

Fill copy area


1. Circle the graphic to be used as a fill
2. Left click on the copy icon in the function bar (shortcut Ctrl+C)
3. Move the mouse to circle the area to be filled
4. Click the Fill Copy Area icon
5. Click on a color block to be filled in the circled area (if you need to fill the same
color block that is not continuous, you need to remove the Connected Area option in
the attribute)

48
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Note: Select the fill method and fill attribute in the right-click property.As shown
below

When the selected direction is the mouse point, if you select the small image by
the copy function of the right-click menu to select, the mouse point when
selecting the small image is the mouse point when filling the small image.

49
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

50
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

When "Keep Module Integrity" is selected, the contents of the copy area must
be filled with one complete unit, and if the fill does not cover enough space, it is
not filled.

51
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

When "Show Copy Area" is selected, the contents of the copy area are displayed
with the mouse, which helps you to align the copied position.Right click to cancel
the display of the copy area and exit the fill copy area function.

Color change
Color block replacement allows multiple color blocks to be processed together at
the same time.
Circle the area to be processed, click the icon and left click on the circle selection
area to jump out the color change options as shown below.
Note: The color code to be replaced can be directly selected by entering the color
number or pulling down.

52
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Retain color: automatically replace the color code that is not retained with the
closest reserved color code, generally used for the reduction of multiple color
codes after the import of foreign images.It is not recommended to replace the
color code at the same time, so that the system only performs retention
processing.
If you can't select a reserved color, change the interface style to something other
than Office 2007.
The figure below shows a 41-color logo pattern converted to a 5-color pattern
after several retention processes.

53
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Scenario: Save the current color change scheme to a file or load a previous color
change scheme from a file.

 Loading: loading the color change scheme file into the current color change
list, invalid color change data will be discarded;
 Save: Save the current color change plan data to a file for use in the next
color change.
Interchange: Supports the interchange of two color codes, and only needs to set
the two color codes that are interchanged as the reserved color.
54
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Quick replacement: After selecting multiple colors by ctrl+left mouse button,


right click through the quick replacement function, and change the replacement
color number of all selected color items to one color code with one button.

55
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Quick Replace: You can also replace all selected colors with the specified color by
setting the desired replacement color by retaining the color and clicking the
Quick Replace button.
56
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 After the quick jacquard is completed, it is necessary to tick the unchecked color
in the reserved color, so that the color code will remain in the color changing
process;

Quickly replace "+": Add a certain color number to the specified color batch.

57
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Quickly replace "-": Reduce the specified color batch by a certain color number.

58
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Solution: Double-click to directly import the color change plan file.Shown in the
scheme list is the color change scheme file saved in the scheme directory.

Fill line
Select the color block and fill it in one line.
When populated in the selection box, the width of the fill is the width of the
selection box.
Right-click property function: If you set the fill by color, only fill the same line
area with the same color as the mouse point.

Holding the ctrl key at the same time, the default is to fill the column.
Holding down the shift key at the same time, the default is to fill the line.

spray gun
Randomly spray a block centered on the current point.

59
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The degree of sparseness of the spray is related to the speed at which the mouse
is dragged.
Right-click attribute function: You can set the size and density of the spray area.

Diffusion method:
 Ignore: Spray with a uniform effect.
 Outward: The spray effect from sparse to dense is achieved from the inside out.
 Inward: The spray effect from sparse to dense is achieved from the outside.
Gradient spray:
 First select the range to be sprayed;
 Click on the starting point of the spray;
 Click on the end point of the spray.
 The spray indicator line identifies the gradient direction of the spray, starting at
density (1) and ending at density (2).

60
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Allow multiple colors:


 Add color code by adding buttons;
 After the color code is selected, the color code can be deleted by the delete
button;
 The effect of the spray follows the settings of the regular and gradient.

adjust size
Adjust the size of the current artboard.
You can directly enter the number of added rows and columns.Negative
numbers indicate that the artboard is reduced.
After the artboard is reduced and then revoked, the pattern outside the reduced
artboard will be discarded. Please use the zoom out function carefully.

61
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Insert row
Insert a row, which is the same as the cursor row, and clones the line.
Including functional lines, intarsia, and jacquard tissue maps are all cloned at the
same time.
While holding down the ctrl key, insert the contents of the box selection box.

Insert blank line


At the bottom of the current cursor, insert a blank line, the behavior of the
background color.
Including the function line, the intarsia, and the jacquard organization map are
all inserted at the same time.
Right-click attribute function: When there is no selection box in the pattern area,
the setting interface for inserting the number of rows and columns appears.
Here, you can modify the number of inserted lines, the height of deleted lines,
and the number of inserted columns and the number of deleted columns.

Right-click attribute function: When selecting the circle selection area, select the
attribute to break the circle within the circle selection area, as shown in the
figure.

62
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The figure below shows the result of inserting a blank line as above.
Note: The insertion method is to insert from the bottom row of the box selection
area, insert a blank line first, and then insert a blank line every other line.

After selecting the partial split, the effect is as follows: only split the circled area

63
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

After selecting the clipboard data, the effect is as follows

The specified color is the number of lines that can be inserted after the color
code according to the specified color code.The number of lines is set by the
64
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

insertion type.
 Increase: increase the input color code specified;
 Delete: delete the selected specified color code;

Insert self-growth is to increase the number of inserted rows after inserting a


65
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

row, insert 1, 2, 3... respectively until the circled area is split.


The interval self-growth is a self-increment of the interval line every time a row
is inserted, and the interval lines are 1, 2, 3, respectively... until the circled area is
split.
After inserting self-growth and interval self-growth, the effects are as follows:

Note: The above functions are effective for all insert and delete row and column
instructions, and the usage is the same.
Inserting blank lines is more frequently used when doing v-necks and other
splitting processes. This method is relatively simple for the above
operations.Therefore, the explanation
Inserting a column or deleting a column does not operate on the function line
diagram.

66
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Insert needle
The current column of the current cursor column is inserted in the same column
as the current cursor column, and the column function is cloned.
While holding down the ctrl key, insert the contents of the box of the selection
box.

Insert empty column


Insert a blank column to the left of the current cursor column, which is the
background color (color 0).

Insert row
Delete the current cursor line.

Delete needle
Delete the current cursor column.

Frame upper
Add a border above the desired color block.
Move the cursor to the position where you want to add a border and click the
left mouse button.
Right-click property function: As follows, this property is valid for all border
functions and is used in the same way.

67
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Symmetry: set whether the width of the four directions of the border is
automatically equal;
 Diagonal: Set whether the four diagonal directions of the top left, top right,
bottom left, and bottom right are valid when generating the border;
 Border width: the width of the up, down, left and right directions can be set
separately;

Lower border (Frame lower)


Add a border below the desired color block, using the same as the top border.
68
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Left border (Frame left)


Add a border to the left of the desired patch, using the same as the top border.

Right border (Frame right)


Add a border to the right of the desired patch, using the same as the top border.

Frame
Add a border outside the desired color block, using the same as the top border.

Clear
Delete all the graphics in a page (bmp or ina) after clicking the icon with the left
mouse button.(The second drawing area of ​ ​ the first drawing area can be
used).
If you circle, you can choose to delete the circle outside the circle or circle the
zone.Left mouse click on the circle selection area to delete the circle selection
area, left mouse click on the circle selection area to delete the circle selection
area.As shown

69
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Rotate
Rotate the circle selection area, click the icon and click on the drawing area to
select the direction, center and rotation angle, as shown below.

The following figure shows an example of a 90 degree rotation:

70
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Stretch
Stretching the circled area allows you to set the size of the stretch.
The color code that needs to be stretched is stretched in proportion.

After stretching, click the left mouse button to paste the new pattern to the
specified position.

71
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Maintain original aspect ratio: Automatically calculate width and height based on
the original size.

shadow
Shadow the circled area.
 Direction: According to the direction key, do shadow processing in the opposite
direction of the pattern.
 Total stitches: Set the number of shadow stitches produced.
 Spacing distance: The number of points between the shadow and the origin.
 Type: Sets the shadow effect on all lines, odd lines, even lines, and interval lines.
 Interval line: Specify the number of interval lines that produce shadow lines.Only
valid when the type selects the interval line.
 Basic Color: Set the color to be shaded. You can set all basic colors to be turned
on or off.
 Shadow Color: Sets the final shadow color.
 Overlay color: Set whether the shadow color appears on the specified color. You
can set to turn all overlay colors on or off.
 You can select the color in the color bar and pattern to set the basic color,
shadow color, and overlay color in order.
 Scenario list: Automatically lists all the shadow scheme files in the custom
scheme directory, and double-click to load the scheme.
 Solution: Support for saving and importing shadow parameters.

Export: Export the current shadow configuration parameters to a file and save it.
The file type defaults to shs.
72
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Import: Import the shs shadow scheme file into the current settings.
An example of adding a return to the shoulder portion:

The following image shows the shadow effect produced after executing :

Shadow example of trimming function:


73
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The following image shows the shadow effect produced after executing :

74
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Clear color block


Clears the color block enclosed by the zero color.
Can be an irregular block.
Any adjacent non-zero color block can be cleared.

Magic wand
Used to select adjacent irregular same color blocks.
Multiple color blocks can be selected by the ctrl key.
You can drag the selected color block to another place with the left mouse
button.
Pressing the ctrl key while dragging will empty its original area at the same time.

75
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The right click properties are as follows:

 Replace color number: Set the replacement color of the area after long pressing
the ctrl key.
 Support for dragging multiple views: While dragging and copying the current
view magic wand content, other views are also followed by drag copy.
 Support for dragging the function line: While dragging and copying the current
view magic wand content, the function line view also follows the drag copy.

eraser
The current color code is used to erase the color block, and the continuous
erasure of the long left button of the mouse is supported.
The right click properties are as follows:

76
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Mirror all
An upgraded version of the horizontal mirroring feature that mirrors the
contents of all views within a specified range.
Horizontal mirroring of paste mode is not supported.
The color code mirror parameter is set in the horizontal mirror property.

Ctrl + left mouse click to achieve vertical mirroring.

Toolbar settings
Set the icons of the drawing tools and their order.

77
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Reset: Restore to the system default tools and their order;


 Export: Save the tool customization configuration to a file;
 Import: Import the custom configuration saved in the file;
 Select all: Select or cancel the tool settings all;
 Up and down: After selecting a tool, you can move the position of the tool by
pressing the "up" and "down" buttons;
 You can also drag and drop the position of the tool by directly pressing the left
mouse button.
 After clicking "OK", the settings of the toolbar icon take effect immediately.

5.1.2 Zoom Tool

Zoom out (Zoom out)


To zoom in on the graph, click on the icon and click once in a certain area of
​ ​ the graphics area (centered on the cursor), zoom in 1 time each time until
the maximum is 20:1.(large icon maximum 32:1)

78
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Zoom to 1x or 20x (large icon is 32x)


Zoom to the maximum or minimum multiples at once.

Zoom in (Zoom in)


The graphic zoom operation, click on the icon and click once in a certain area of
​ ​ the graphics area (centered on the cursor) to zoom out by 1 time until the
minimum is 1:1.

Move to the upper left corner


Move the drawing area to the upper left corner.

Move up
Move the drawing area up.

Move to the upper right corner


Move the drawing area to the upper right corner.

move to the left


Move the drawing area to the left.

Centered
Center the drawing area.

move to the right


Move the drawing area to the right.

Move to the lower left corner


Move the drawing area to the lower left corner.

79
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Move Downward
Move the drawing area down.

Move to the lower right corner


Move the drawing area to the lower right corner.

5.1.3 Flat knitting machine tools


Pattern, intarsia, jacquard organization chart, pattern illustration.
Pattern: stitching, organization, layout.
Intarsia: Jacquard, the figure and the sand mouth data when drawing the summer.
Jacquard organization chart: The definition map of the third picture.
Jacquard area map: Limit the jacquard yarn feeder area layer.
Jacquard yarn feeder map: Set the jacquard yarn feeder group layer.
Degree chart: Create a variability eye layer.
Pattern: The pat split diagram that was called after the compilation was completed.
In the drawing area, page turning of each organization can be performed.The effect is
as follows

Pattern intarsia
Left click on the icon to copy the pattern page to the Intarsia page and copy all
the pattern image information.
Usually used when making jacquard drawings.
The effect is as follows

80
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Note: The following icons do the same, the same method, the same effect.

Pattern jacquard
Left click on the icon to copy the pattern page to the Jacquard organization page.

Intarsia pattern
Left click on the icon to copy the Intarsia page to the pattern page.

Intarsia jacquard tissue


Left click on the icon to copy the Intarsia page to the Jacquard organization page.

Jacquard tissue pattern


Left click on the icon to copy the jacquard organization page to the pattern page.

Jacquard organization

81
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Left click on the icon to copy the Jacquard organization page to the Intarsia page.

5.2 General Toolbar Icons

This function bar provides shortcut operations such as creating, saving, undoing,
copying, and automatically generating action files.

New (Open new file)


The newly created file name is named after HqPDS.
After clicking the icon, first select the machine type, pay attention to choose the
correct machine type.

Note: h in the machine list represents the flat knitting machine, 2 represents the 2
system, and -2 represents one of the subtypes.
Then select or customize the desired artboard size for the input.
82
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The basic rib pattern and function line can be output immediately.

Note: When the big body pattern is rib, it is also the current rib type.
If there is no reflection when creating a new one, exit or report an error
immediately. Please cancel the "Advanced (Advanced (No machine type
selection) option is canceled.

Open existing file


Open an existing pattern document for editing or viewing.
Only documents with the pds extension can be opened.

Save
Save the current document.
The suffix of the document is called pds.

Undo (Undo)
To cancel the current operation in the drawing area, click once to go back one
step, the number of undo can be set by yourself, the default is 25 times.
You can undo multiple steps at once in the drop-down box.

83
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

All actions of the pattern, the intarsia, the jacquard organization chart, the
pattern, and the function line area can be undone.

Recovery (Redo)
Restore the operation of the drawing area revocation (including the function line
drawing area), click once to restore one step, the number of recovery is the same
as the number of revocations.
The icon is highlighted and activated only after the operation is cancelled.
You can restore multiple steps at once in the drop-down box.
It can restore all the movements of the pattern, the intarsia, the jacquard
organization chart, the pattern picture, and the function line area.

Cut
After the circle has to be circled, the icon activates to brighten.
When the circled target exists, move the mouse and left click on the icon to cut
the content in the circled area to reveal the background color.
You can also press the shortcut key Ctrl-X to perform the cutting process.
The background color of this plate making system is black (color block 0,
84
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

indicating empty needle)


Patterns cut into the pasteboard can only be recognized by the system.

Copy
After the circle selection has been made, the icon is highlighted and activated.
After clicking the icon, the circle selection graphic is copied to the clipboard.
You can also press the shortcut key Ctrl-C to copy.
Patterns copied to the pasteboard can only be recognized by the system.

Paste
Paste the pattern in the clipboard into the drawing area. After clicking the icon,
the copied graphic appears at the cursor. Drag the cursor to the target area and
click the left button to complete the paste.
Quick copy mode: circle the target graphic, move the cursor to any position in
the circle, click the left mouse button, drag the graphic to the target position and
then click the left button to complete the copy. If you need to copy multiple
times, just in the white circle. Click in the selection area and drag and drop to the
target area.
If you want to paste into the function line area, you must first select the function
line area, then press Ctrl-V, or click the paste button to enter the function line
area from the menu bar.

Grid switch
Whether the grid area requires a grid prompt, the icon highlights the grid
prompt, and vice versa.,

85
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Tip switch
Prompts the coordinates and knitting information of the color block pointed by
the cursor.
The information displayed in the pattern is the color block, coordinates, color
number, and meaning.
The information displayed in the intarsia, jacquard tissue, and pattern is color
block and meaning.
The information displayed in the function line is color patches, coordinates,
meanings, detailed descriptions, and so on.

86
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Analog tissue switch


Click the icon to display the weaving effect of the first drawing area, and the
function line drawing area displays the existing set value and the numerical
number of the function line.
The minimum multiple that shows the simulated tissue can be set in the
advanced settings.

Center line switch


The center line of the selection box is displayed. To change the center line, you
need to select the reset center line function in the right-click menu.
The odd-width selection box displays two centerlines.
The even width selection box displays a centerline.

87
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Symmetrical drawing switch


Symmetric processing is supported when drawing.
Support for brushes, polylines, lines, curves, rectangles, filled rectangles,
rounded rectangles, filled rounded rectangles, ellipses, filled ellipses, diamonds,
filled diamonds, polylines, filled polylines, closed curves, The closed curve of the
fill.
The steps are as follows:
 Open centerline switch
 Set a centerline in the right-click menu
 Open symmetric drawing switch
 Basic drawing processing

Whether the color code of the symmetric drawing is converted is controlled by


the "allow mirror" attribute of the horizontal mirror.

Adjust the selection box switch


Support for the selection of the selection box, irregular selection can continue to
adjust its size.

88
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The adjustment point of the selection box is the center point of the four vertices
and the four borders.

The adjustment point of the irregular selection box is all endpoints.

When the mouse moves over the adjustment point, click the left mouse button,
and long press the left mouse button to drag the adjustment point to the new
position, then release the left mouse button to complete the adjustment action.

Selection of color
Select multiple colors as a combination for other features.
This function does not do any processing by itself. It needs to be combined with
the copy option (current color, non-current color), and then processed by other
functions to play a role.
When the drawing tool is a hand, you can select the color with the mouse in the
color bar or pattern. If the color is already in the selection list, the color will be
89
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

deleted.
Double-clicking on the selected color will delete the color.
You can delete all the colors in the selection list at once by using the clear
function.
All colors can be extracted from the pattern selection box by the extraction
function to enter the selection list.
Disable color selection: Used to temporarily block color selection.

Color mask
Select multiple colors as a mask combination for other features.
It is effective in functions such as points, polylines, lines, curves, rectangles,
rounded rectangles, ellipses, and diamonds.
When the drawing tool is a hand, you can select the color with the mouse in the
color bar or pattern. If the color is already in the selection list, the color will be
deleted.
Double-clicking on the selected color will delete the color.
You can delete all the colors in the selection list at once by using the clear
function.
All colors in the pattern selection box can be automatically added by the
extraction function.
90
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

It is used when you need to keep some color codes from being overwritten
during the drawing process.
When canceling the current color, it means blocking the colors in all unshielded
lists.
Disabling color masking can achieve unshielded effects without removing the
mask color code.

Color lookup
All color codes in the current pattern are automatically listed.

91
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

If there is a checkbox, only all the color codes in the selection box are listed.
Click to select the color you want to find, then click Next (search from top to
bottom) and Previous (from bottom to top).

The color code found is displayed if it is not in the current display area.
The found color code position will be colored and the transparent display will be
displayed.

Module replacement
Used for the replacement of patches, not for the replacement of a single color
code.
The replacement and replaced modules must be exactly the same size.
Get the replacement and replaced modules by selecting the box.
92
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 After selecting the replaced module, click the "find..." button to set it;

 After selecting the replacement module, click the "Replace..." button to set
it;

93
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Click the "Replace" button to replace the module in the selected range.And
report the number of successful replacements.

 Click the "Clear" button to reset the module contents.


94
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

There will be a replacement prompt when the module sizes are not equal.

 Click "OK" to import the currently selected module and automatically clear
another selection module.
Check "Select Area" to replace it within the specified range.Otherwise replace it
in the entire pattern.

upload files
Transfer the current pattern to the cloud server for saving.
There is a confirmation prompt before uploading, and the upload starts after
confirmation.

After the upload is successful, the cloud file name is displayed, and the file name
is copied to the pasteboard.

95
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

download file
Download the pattern saved by the cloud server to the current pattern.

The current pattern should be cleared before downloading.


The compilation options for the original pattern can be downloaded at the same
time.

Calculator
The system's calculator can be called directly.As shown below

Drawing
You can call the drawing tool of Windows directly.

96
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

folder
You can call the Windows Explorer directly.
If there is no new pattern currently created, or if the pattern is not yet named,
go to the directory where the patterning software example is located.
If the pattern has been named, enter the directory where the pattern is located.

Browser
You can directly call the Windows Ethernet browser.
The new feature description of the current plate making system is displayed by
default.

Example pattern

You can open the example pattern in the installation package directly.
There are partial jacquard, intarsia, needle reduction, hat, upper, variability and
other patterns and sample pictures.

Current color
Only copy the current color.
Circle the area you want to copy first, right click on the color selection, select the
color you want to copy, click the icon, then click the circle selection area and drag the
cursor.
As shown below, select copy gray
Note: This function is valid when the circle cursor is activated, the same below.

97
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

As shown in the figure below, set the current color to No. 2, and hold down the
Ctrl key during copying to cut and paste the No. 2 color of the diamond into the new
area.

For the current color, if a plurality of colors have been selected by the color
selection function, these selected colors are treated as the current color.
98
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Non-current color
Copy all colors except the current one.
First circle the area you want to copy, right-click on the color selection, select the
color you want to copy, click the icon, then click the circle selection area and
drag the cursor.
As shown below, choose not to copy gray

all colours
General copy
The method of use is the same as copying, that is, copying all the colors in the
circle.
These three color switches are effective during copying and pasting.

Compilation
See Chapter 12, "Picture Compilation."

Yarn feeder direction display


After the compilation is complete, click to automatically jump to the function

99
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

line drawing area and display the direction of the yarn feeder.
1 means the right side of the machine head, 2 means the left line of the machine
head.
After the yarn feeder direction is displayed, if the drawing tool is “Move”, the
cursor is displayed as a left and right arrow in the pattern.

Yarn feeder system group setting


This function is only effective for braided form function lines and sets the effect
of the yarn feeder group.
Home: Jump to the first page yarn feeder group;
Last page: Jump to the last page of the yarn feeder group;
“+”: jump to the next page yarn feeder group;
"-": jump to the previous page yarn feeder group;
In the jacquard, the relationship between the color code and the yarn feeder is
indicated, as well as the wide yarn feeder setting of the spandex yarn feeder and
jacquard.
The wide yarn feeder setting is indicated in the intarsia, and the yarn feeder
behind the yarn feeder group "+" indicates the second wide yarn feeder.
The wide yarn feeder of the jacquard is also indicated after the "+" in the yarn
feeder group.
Used in v-neck for double yarn feeder knitting settings.

100
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Note: The above figure shows that the No. 2 color block of the Yinta Xia page
specifies the No. 4 yarn feeder and the No. 1 color block specifies the No. 5 yarn
feeder (Right line).No. 3 color block specifies No. 7 yarn feeder (left line).
In the weaving form of the jacquard, the yarn feeder number of the spandex is
set by 9-x, and the knitting line to which the spandex needs to be added is set by
the jacquard hanging function line.

101
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

In the weaving form of the jacquard, the yarn feeder number of the wide yarn
feeder is set by 9-9, and one system is provided with two yarn feeders.

It can also be entered after the plus sign to indicate the wide yarn feeder.

In the weaving form of the Intarsia, a wide yarn feeder can be set here.

64 sets of yarn feeder settings can be supported.


Use the “Clear” function to clear the yarn feeder group setting of the current
page number.
Export the current yarn feeder group settings to an external file with the
"Export" function.

102
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The external file yarn feeder group information is imported into the current
pattern by the "Import" function.
Through the "automatic (1)" function, the yarn feeder information is
automatically extracted and filled according to the definition of the yarn feeder
group in the function line, wherein the yarn feeders are arranged from small to
large, and the yarn feeders which weave one side and weave the jacquard are
preferred.
Through the "automatic (2)" function, the yarn feeder information is
automatically extracted and filled according to the definition of the yarn feeder
group in the function line, wherein the yarn feeders are arranged from large to
small, and the yarn feeders which weave one side and weave the jacquard are
preferred.

Yarn feeder starting position setting


Set whether the yarn feeder is available and the initial left and right parking
positions of the yarn feeder.
After the weaving is completed, each yarn feeder is returned to its original

103
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

orientation.
1-8 denotes the left yarn feeder and 11-18 denotes the right yarn feeder.

In order to fix the setting yarn feeder to the left and right system weaving, it
must be set to "Specify System" on the locking system function line.

 The designated system is generally used for left and right collars, so that the left
collar can be fixed in the left system and the right collar in the right system.
 For two-system machines, the left and right system weaving can also be specified
by setting the yarn feeder 1 (1) and the yarn feeder 1 (2) on the yarn feeder (1)
function line, wherein the yarn feeder 1 (1) is fixed to the left system weaving. ,

104
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

the yarn feeder 1 (2) is fixed in the right system weave.However, in the case of
the addition and subtraction of the needle, the yarn feeder cannot be
automatically brought out to a safe position and needs to be handled
manually.Do not check the automatic yarn feeder with the braided form.

The pattern is copied to...


This feature needs to be used after compiling.
Its function is: copy the files that can be used by the lower computer directly to
the mobile disk you need (such as u disk, etc.).
Click the icon and select the path you want to copy and confirm.As shown below

105
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Single Process
Enter the next number of processes to generate the corresponding pattern. See
the introduction of the process sheet for details.

Send the machine file to


Send the file to the u disk.The files on the machine include cnt/pat/prm/ytx, hcd,
and so on.
When there are multiple u disks, a list of u disks will appear for selection.

The machine file will be sent to the root directory of the specified u disk.

Send folder to
Send all the files in the folder where the current pattern is located and its
subfolders to the u disk in batches.
When there are multiple u disks, a list of u disks will appear for selection.

The u disk will automatically generate the folder and its subdirectories.

Safety pin number setting


Set the number of safety needles for each needle type machine.

106
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Number of needles for yarn feeder: refers to the number of safety needles that
need to be separated when the two yarn feeders of the same rail are not
collided.
Intensive Safety Number of Intarsia: When a system is segmented with a plurality
of yarn feeders, the machine head puts down the first yarn feeder and then
raises the minimum number of needles for the next yarn feeder.
v Collar safety stitch number: The number of safety stitches when performing a
row of two yarn feeders between the left and right collars is generally equal to
the safety stitch number of the intarsia.
Export: Save the security pin number information data in the list to a file.
Import: Import the security pin number information data in the file into the list.

Display compilation information


Displays the list information generated after the previous compilation.
It is convenient to adjust the compilation results at any time.

107
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Yarn mouth setting


Set the front and rear bed information of each yarn feeder.

Up to 32 pages of yarn feeder information can be set.


The yarn feeder information should be used in conjunction with the "233-1 yarn
feeder" function line.Set the number of page groups in the function line.
 When the yarn feeder has a specified degree in the setting page number, the
degree in the setting is preferred;
 When the specified degree is 0, the degree in the 207 function line is used.
This set of degrees is generally used for complex weaving forms.

Module management

Enter the module management interface


 Import, export, modify, delete, etc.

108
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.3 Drawing area weaving color code

1. Click the button in the patch area to be the current patch you selected.
2. A total of 256 color blocks (0-255), click the left and right buttons, the color
blocks will scroll in left or right order or reverse order.
3. For the currently used color block, double-click this button to directly input
the digital code of the color block.
4. Press the up and down color change buttons and click to automatically jump
to the previous or next color code.
The number keys are used as shortcut keys for the color bar. For example, by
pressing the “1”, “0” and “0” numbers, you can select the 100-pin color code.

0-119 (conventional color code), 120-183 (user macro color block use range,
small color code), 184-187 (false color code), 191-198 (front and rear pin color code),
228 -239 (first shaker and then turn back the color code), 244-248 (the second
paragraph), 249 (front and rear), 255 (special color)

Empty needle
Neutral

Front tuck
Front tuck

Rear eye
Rear tuck
109
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Front weaving
Front knit / rear tuck

Front hoisting
Front tuck / rear knit

Front weave, no connection (front weft)


Front knit (without links)

After weaving, no connection (post weft)


Rear knit (without links)

Before and after the needle, no connection (four flat)


Front / rear knit (without links)

Front and rear


Front / rear tuck

Front drop cloth


Drop cloth before

No needle selection (front and rear shuttle weaving)


No needle select

After falling cloth (off shuttle weaving)


Drop-cloth after

Use a patch range for the user macro.(See user macro guide for
details)

Color block selection

If the desired color block is not in the current color block area, you can use the
left and right arrows to turn the page to find it, or you can double click any color
block by the mouse, and pop up the color block input window to directly input the
desired color block number digital code to complete the color block. select.

110
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Drawing information prompt

5.4 Menu Bar

5.4.1 File Menu


Including new, open, import, save as and other functions.As shown below

111
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The original pattern can be previewed when importing.

You must create a new artboard before importing.


For picasso patterns, they can only be recognized by the system through import.
At present, you can import pattern patterns drawn by picasso1.0, 2.06, 2.12,
2.14, 3.13, 5.01, 5.06, and 6.05. Otherwise, the message “The function line
graphic is incorrect” will be reported.
You can export the current pattern to a bmp file.
You can also import dat patterns.

112
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

When opened, the interface for selecting the pattern will appear:

 Convert color code: convert the color code of the dat pattern to the color code
definition of the constant forced version system; the color code that cannot be
converted is automatically converted to the small color code;
 Rib setting: set the processing method such as rib and waste yarn at the
beginning, the specific usage is the same as the process sheet;

113
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Advanced: Same as the process sheet, only relevant information such as ribbing
and yarn feeder is valid;
 Pattern selection: Double-click the left mouse button inside the specific pattern
that needs to be imported to complete the selection and conversion;

 Note: After the pattern conversion is completed, the yarn feeder function line
needs to be further checked and modified.
 A compressed dat pattern can be imported.
Save as
 You can save the pattern as a 950, 960 format so that the pattern can be opened
in an earlier version.

 After the pattern is saved as an earlier version format, there will be some loss of
information, that is, the advanced functions and their settings cannot be used
later.
Summary

114
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Enter a summary description of the process;

 The file upload and download function also automatically transmits summary
information, which can be used for interactive explanation.

5.4.2 Edit menu


Including undo, restore, cut, copy, paste, select all and other functions.As shown
below

The Select All function will make a circle for the entire pattern area.
The jump to function moves the specified line to the display center of the
pattern area.

115
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.3 View menu


Includes toolbars, paste bars, display switches, view switches, and more.As
shown below

You can choose to hide or show the view tool.Check the display to show,
otherwise hide.Once the workspace, color tool, or drawing tool is turned off, it
can be opened here.

Mirror view: Dividing the drawing into two identical drawing areas, the
coordinates of which are synchronized, and the left and right can be moved
separately.Convenient for the left and right patterns when doing the process.To
the right of the reference left, refer to the function to the left of the right.As
shown below

116
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Function line view: You can choose whether to display the function line view.The
figure below shows the drawing interface without displaying the function line,
which can maximize the drawing area.

5.4.4 Advanced menu


Includes language settings, interface styles, advanced settings and more.
The language can choose Chinese, English and other languages.

117
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The plate system must be restarted after changing the language.


Interface style: You can choose different styles of office2000, office XP,
office20003, windows XP, etc. according to user preferences.(default is windows
XP)

Settings: including drawing, rotation, brush brush, shortcut keys, advanced,


machine type, flat knitting machine and other parameters.
Drawing settings: You can set the number of additions and deletions, the
number of rows and columns, and other drawing parameters.

118
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The movement of the artboard can be controlled by scroll bar, mouse wheel,
mouse + space.
 When the display ratio is 1:1, the selection box type is fixed to the moving ant
line.
 The shortcut key for inserting and deleting the number of lines is “Ctrl+Digital
Key”.
 Copy function line: When inserting a blank line, the function line of the current
line is automatically copied to the blank line.
 Selection box color: Specify the selection box to be drawn, the irregular selection
box, and the color of the marker box displayed in the magic wand range.
 Center color code: displays the color of the center point of the four sides of the
selection box.Odd needles have a center point, while even needles have two
center points.

119
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Paste point: Set the default paste origin of the mouse when the paste function is
set.
 Mouse point: Right-click the relative position of the mouse when copying
the pattern;

Brush brush settings: Set the line and rectangle types respectively.
 The shortcut key for the brush style is “Alt+number keys”.
 Alt+0 means solid; Alt+1 means 1 interval 1; Alt+2 means 1 interval 2; Alt+3
means 1 interval 3; Alt+4 means 1 interval 4; Alt+5 means 2 interval 1; Alt+6
means 2 interval 1; Alt+6 means 2 separated by 2;

120
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Custom: Users can customize the brush brush type to suit their needs.

121
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Shortcut key settings: Drawing tools of the drawing toolbar can be defined with
shortcut keys. Users can move the cursor to the drawing tool to view the
prompts, or define shortcut keys here.

122
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Note: After modifying the settings of the shortcut keys, be sure to save the settings
so that the shortcut keys will be restored to the default settings after the system is
reinstalled next time.You can import your own shortcut settings via the import
function.
 The drawing tool shortcut is used to set the drawing tool. Only the 26
uppercase letters of az can be set. After setting, it must be restarted to take
effect.
 The flat menu shortcut is used to set the flat knitting machine menu. You
can only set Ctrl+F1-Ctrl+F12 keys, and it will take effect immediately after
setting.
 Double-click the shortcut file in the scheme to automatically load the
shortcut settings under this configuration.
 The pre-set shortcut key scheme is stored in the CfgFiles subdirectory of the
software installation directory.
Advanced settings: Views in the platemaking system and advanced settings on

123
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

the system, including toolbar display, icon display scale, number of undo, grid
color, minimum proportion of simulated organization, and more.

124
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Display the function line indicator bar view: Open or close the function line
vertical index indicator bar window.
 Directly click on the number on the window to navigate to the function line;

125
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Enable mouse direction pointer: Set the mouse shape to be displayed as a


directional arrow in any state.
 The selection box mode is "corresponding when clicked" and is compatible with
picasso.
 When the scroll wheel mode is “Move”, hold down Shift at the same time to
move horizontally. The number of rows and columns moved at a time is set by
the drawing parameters.
 The number of colors per page is used to set the number of colors displayed on
the color bar, 0 means to display by the maximum number of displays, and when
the number of settings is greater than the maximum number of displays, it is
displayed by the maximum number of displays.
 The current color is oriented toward the current selection color in the color bar.

126
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The temporary directory is used to save the system temporary use or the default
file, and the empty indicates the current system path.
 Scenario Directory: Used to define the schema save directory in the scheme
list.The list of currently supported programs is:
 Compilation scheme
 Shortcut key scheme
 Template scheme
 Shadow scheme
 Area direction: Specify the direction of the area to look for when looking for a
connected area such as padding.
 4: ↑↓ ← → four directions;
 8: ↑↓ ← → ↖↗↙↘ eight directions.
 Menu size: You can set the font of the menu yourself, 0 means the default
system font size.
 The automatic save function should be used with care to prevent the exit and
save the pattern is not the pattern you ultimately need.
 The number of cancellations can be set according to drawing habits and machine
performance.
 If the system automatically exits or reports the machine type error when
creating a new one, unset the "Disable machine type selection" option.
 Update manual: Set whether to automatically update the manual when
upgrading online.
 Allow long file name: The file name that supports saving the pattern is longer
than 8 characters.
 Show start video: Set whether to display the boot promotion video when the
plate making system starts.
 Pattern privilege control: In the case of successful secondary registration, the
user can set the control individual pattern to be opened by others.
Permission account: You can set the account for controlling the opening
permission of the pattern.
127
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

When someone opens the pattern, they will be asked to enter an account
number and enter "000" as shown in the example above.

 Enable abnormal recovery: When the pattern is abnormally exited, it will


automatically prompt whether to recover when it is opened again.

 It is recommended to select “OK” to restore. If the recovered pattern is not


what you need, you can use the Undo button to undo the previously saved
pattern.
 If the pattern is too large, it will affect the drawing speed. It is recommended
to turn off this option.
 Display grid size: Displays the grid when the display scale is not less than this
size.
 Positioning color: Use the shortcut keys to mark different anchor points when
drawing.
 Click the shortcut key once to set the positioning point;
 Clicking the secondary shortcut repeatedly will cancel the anchor point.
 You can switch the drawing coordinate points by clicking the shortcut key;
 There are three navigation shortcuts, which are "`", "-", and "+".
 You can automatically draw the largest selection box containing all the left
points of the positioning by clicking the "\" key.
128
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Flat knitting machine settings: Partial settings for the flat knitting machine and
compile options.

 Automatically save the yarn feeder starting position - After the "flat knitting
machine (yarn opening position" setting is set, the set data is saved to the
database, and the next pattern defaults to this setting.
 Change the cnt file when clicked.Click this when the cnt file is edited after this
129
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

option takes effect. The default is double-click to select.


 If there is "Cannot have woven, tuck" or "Exceeded the maximum number of
stitches at the same time" during compilation, you can cancel the "Check before
compiling" setting when you are sure that the pattern is ok.
 The default analog tissue coil diagram is black and white optimized, and you can
set "Use black coil" to cancel this optimized display.
 "Save Expanded File" can save the intermediate file of the pattern with the
thumbnail. The file name is suffixed with EXP and can be opened by picasso.
 When the bottom plate machine supports "Clip Clip Linkage", please set it to
"Clip Clip Linkage". At this time, the "Clamping Line (Scissors) function line is
used as "Yarn Out 4".
 "Show Compilation Options" is used to set the option interface for displaying and
compiling before compiling.
 Export Single View Templates makes the exported template compatible with the
lower version of the Constant Force Edition system.
 F3 switch pattern <-> Intarsia view: When you press the f3 shortcut, it will not
switch to other views.
 Automatically load compile options: Load the compile options for the pattern as
soon as the pattern is opened.
 Enable ic/ij color code: Set whether to support ic intarsia, ij jacquard color code.
 Automatic loading of the process order: When the process order is opened, the
process order data of the last time the pattern is generated is preferentially
loaded.If it is a new pattern, the last opened work order is loaded.
 Automatic loading of process order parameters: The parameters of the process
order are automatically loaded while the process order is being loaded.
 Automatically load the color fill file between the yarn feeders: automatically load
the yarn feeder list information of the color filling tool between the yarn feeders.
 The safety number of the intarsia is used in the “Intarsia User (81-2)”. When it is
less than the number of safety needles, the automatic method of automatic
demolition is used to weave the intarsia.
130
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The back bed weaving mode when the jacquard yarn feeders are vacant in the
empty line can be set in the "back bed mode".
 The "tuck method" supports four different types. When the drop pattern is
selected, the hooks are added to each line after the hooks are added. If multiple
lines are required to be processed once, the cloth needs to be added manually.
Row.
 "Danging distance" and "television interval" are used to automatically add the
tuck when the empty needle is in the jacquard. When the hanging distance is
greater than the hanging distance, no lifting is added.
 “ Try Speed ​ ​ Optimization” is used to optimize execution efficiency during
jacquard, which allows the jacquard action to be performed in the same action
line as a normal weave line or even a turn line.
 The “Try New Back” is used in the form of a new backing in bags, bags and deer.
It is mainly used for sesame dots without long dashes.

5.4.5 Window Menu


You can operate on multiple windows currently.

You can switch to display a list of currently open documents.

5.4.6 Help menu


A description of the help for this system.

131
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Help: To display this manual, you need to install the pdf reader first.
Update the help manual: Online upgrade to the manual that matches the current
language options.
Online upgrade: As long as your system can connect to the Internet, you can use
this feature to upgrade your system at any time.Otherwise, the following error
message is displayed and online upgrade is not possible.

 In the case of networking, the new version is automatically checked after the
system is running.The upgrade process can be performed when the following
prompt window appears.

 The upgrade process is divided into three steps. First click the "Check" button to
check if it is the latest version.

132
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 If there is the latest version, you will be prompted to download. You must save
all the customized templates before downloading, so as not to be overwritten by
the upgrade program. For how to save the template, please refer to the template
section in the context menu.
 When the update speed is slow, you can try not to update the manual to speed
up the update process.
 Secondly, click the "Download" button, and the system will automatically
download the program components that need to be updated.

 Finally, when all the components have been downloaded, click the "Update"
button to complete the update.Please confirm that you have exited the plate
making system before updating.
133
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Re-enter the plate making system.


The history of adding and deleting function points is displayed in the update
history, and is no longer displayed for modification.

Registration: Registered authorized users, users who have passed the registration
are allowed to compile the patterns containing the next-generation functions
into the upper-level files in the cnt format when the computer is connected to
the Internet.
 Before registration, you must obtain the user and password from Hengqiang
Company through appropriate channels. The user name and password are
strictly case sensitive.

 When registering, the computer must be connected to the Internet. If the


registration fails, the related reasons, such as the wrong password, will be
134
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

displayed.

 The registered account can only be used by the person. Once there are multiple
people using the same account, the account will be automatically blacklisted and
disabled.
 For accounts that are no longer used, please clear the account information by
using the “Clear” function.
 Network check: Check if the registration server can be connected.Note: The
router must support 8000 ports.

 Network score: Check the status of the connection registration server. The higher
the score, the faster the network is, and the 100 is the perfect score.At present,
the server is a telecommunication network, and the support for broadband such
as Netcom and Great Wall will be slower.

135
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 It only makes sense if the network checks for normal networking scores.
 Server address: You can select a different registration server. When one server is
abnormal, you can select another server to ensure that the online service is
normal.It is recommended to select the server with the highest score as the
current registration server based on the network score.

 Install the SOAP runtime: When the network is normal but the registration is
abnormal, you can try to install the SOAP runtime to solve it.No more can try to
delete and reinstall msxml4 and msxml6.
Change password: You can modify the initial password. Please note it after the
password is modified.

 Reset password: You can reset the password by verifying the ID number and
mobile phone number submitted at the time of registration. The password is
automatically generated and sent to the email address at the time of application.
Please provide this information when you have feedback questions about the
version number, compilation date, etc. of the display system, so that we can
check the problem.
The above registration function has been cancelled after 980.
136
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

When the online upgrade fails or is not connected to the Internet, you can go to
the Download Center to download the appropriate version.
 If you have any questions, please join the qq group.
 The qq number is only open to important customers.

137
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7 Flat knitting machine menu


Flat knitting machine: The specific processing of the flat knitting machine
operation.

5.4.7.1 Machine Type: Select to set a new model.

138
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.2 Back jacquard: Self-defined back jacquard weave.

 Used when the weaving form is "Jacquard (user)".


 The back jacquard data is stored in a 1x1 file.
 Click on the blank point to appear the needle coil, click on the existing coil to
change the needle.
 Right click to modify the custom size.

5.4.7.3 User Macro: The color definition of the color code is used.

139
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Existing small maps are more flexible and convenient, and small images are
recommended.
 The file of the user macro is a uwd file.
 The user color code is 120~183, a total of 64 color codes, free to use in the color
code area.
 In the actual action area, the actual execution action of the user color code can
be set, and each color code can set up to 64 action combinations.
 At the same time, the function line value can be set in each line of action. If not
set, the default function line value of the pattern line of the user color code is
used.
 When the user color code is used in the pattern, set the "user macro" function
line, and set the user's page number on it. If the page number is not set, it is
considered as the small picture color code.
 Use the "+" and "-" buttons to switch user page numbers, up to 64 groups.
 The automatic connection is enabled when the setting in the user function line
ends, otherwise the automatic connection is closed.
 The current user action can be copied by the "Copy" button.

140
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The uwd file in other patterns can be loaded via the "Load" button.

5.4.7.4 User Macro Front Desk: Shows the yarn feeder used in the front
knitting of the user.

 Only the range of users in the active pattern area is displayed.


 There is a setting of the yarn feeder (1) in the user information.
 The user macro feature line must be set.

5.4.7.5 User Macro Back: Shows the yarn feeder used by the user in
the middle weaving.

141
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.6 Conventional tools (yarn nozzle separation).

142
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

143
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The system automatically lists all the yarn feeders in the yarn feeder 1 (1) for
separation.
 If there is a selection box in the function line view, only the yarn feeders within
the height of the selection box are listed.
 Check the yarn feeder number where you want to set the wide yarn feeder.
 After the setting is completed, it will automatically jump to the yarn feeder (2)
function line.

144
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.7 conventional tools (yarn feeder -> braided form.

 The system automatically lists all the yarn feeders in the yarn feeder 1 (1) for
separation.
 If there is a selection box in the function line view, only the yarn feeders within
the height of the selection box are listed.
 Check the yarn feeder number that needs to be converted to a braided form.
 After the setting is completed, it will automatically jump to the braided function
line.
 The reverse back can automatically add 100 to the back form for creating a
reverse jacquard back.
 Automatically set the ic/ij mark: If there is an ic/ij color code in the pattern, the
ic/ij mark is automatically set in the function line.
 Automatic Lycra: For the jacquard, the 225-1 Jacquard Tie function line is
automatically set.

5.4.7.8 Conventional tools (color fill between yarn feeders).


 Set the color yarn feeder on the already drawn pattern.
 The yarn feeder 1 is a system yarn feeder.
 The yarn feeder 2 is a two-system yarn feeder and it is recommended not to use
145
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

it as much as possible.
 Cycle 1 and Cycle 2 respectively set the cycle information of the color between
the yarn feeders, and the setting method is similar to the internal saving and
external saving of the function line.
 Number of starting lines: 0 lines means starting from the big mark line.
 Right click menu function

 Loop: Batch set the loop 1 data of the selected color data line.

 Knotting interval, follow-up, knotting method: used to automatically knot the


yarn feeders of the color.The rules are the same as the "automatic yarn feeder
knotting" function.
 A number of interval lines of 0 means no knotting.
 The yarn feeder is only knotted within its braided range.If it is beyond the
weaving range, it will not be knotted.
 Knotting method: The position of the knotting yarn feeder.

146
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Auto: The knot position is automatically calculated based on the knot


interval.
 Odd lines: Knotted on odd lines based on automatically calculated positions.
 Even rows: Knotted on even rows based on the automatically calculated
position.
 Yarn feeder direction: Knotted according to the direction of the yarn feeder
according to the automatically calculated position.
 Cross: Knot the upper and lower cross at the yarn feeder.
 Cross (2): Similar to the cross, but the next yarn feeder is changed to two
lines in advance to start knotting.
 Auto + Cross: Combines automatic and cross mode knotting.Optimization
plan.
 Select all: Select or cancel the color yarn feeders. You can also specify the yarn
feeders that need to be knotted here.
 Save: Save the current yarn feeder information to the guidance file with the file
type “yfc”.

 Load: Imports the saved color fill file between the yarn feeders.

147
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.9 General tools (forming settings).

 First circle a range and specify it for the molding setup.


 When the actual number of needles is larger than the number of needles, it
indicates the edge.
148
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Jacquard will use the eight dedicated jacquard pin color codes of 191-198.
 Customize the left and right pin color code, which is usually a small color code.
 Total number of needles added: Set the needle position when the needle is
added, and the needle does not generate the needle.
 Select All: Set or cancel the specified number of pins to generate the pin color
code, or select it individually before the number of stitches.

5.4.7.10 General Tools (1x1 Transform).


 The entire pattern is subjected to 1x1 transformation processing.
 The small image will also be transformed accordingly.
 The bones need to be handled by themselves.

149
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The compile option "1x1 Transform" is set at compile time.

5.4.7.11 General tools (compression, separation.

 First circle a range, specified for compression separation, otherwise the entire
pattern.
 Only the pattern before the end of the line is compressed and separated.
 The "Respond" action can only be selected if the compression is separated first.
150
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 It can be compressed and separated multiple times.


 Each compression separation can only be replied once.
 The post-compression separated line is first subjected to a reply process.
 The compression separation process is processed according to the function line
and its value.

 The compressed pattern can be further processed, but the function of inserting

151
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

rows and columns and deleting rows and columns must not be used.

 Clear compressed data: Can't reply after emptying.


 The compression separation is not replied and there is a warning confirmation
before exiting the pattern.

152
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 V-collar processing: For v-neck and other forms, you can compress without the
function line, but compress it according to the local blank line in the pattern.

 V-collar processing: The processing steps after compression are the same as the
compression processing steps according to the function line.

5.4.7.12 General tools (sliding depiction.

 First circle a range, specified for sliding depiction.


 Increase the color code that does not need to be swiped.
 Determine the direction of the slide.
 The center line must be set first when sliding on the centerline.
153
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 After sliding, the pattern can be further processed, but the function of inserting
rows and columns and deleting rows and columns must not be used.

154
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 After trimming, the original pattern shape can be restored by the reply function,
but the changes made by the trimming have been changed to the pattern.
 Clear slide data: Cannot revert to the original shape after emptying.
 There is no reply after sliding drawing, and there will be a confirmation prompt
when you exit the pattern.
155
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.13 Conventional tools (needle separation).


 The needle selection area is subjected to needle separation treatment.
 Only the pin color code can be processed.
 The principle of turning both sides first is performed when turning the needle
separately.
 The pinning line inserted during separation is automatically set to cancel the
knitting mark.

156
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

157
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.14 General Tools (Set the needle separately.

 Automatically set the respective needle function lines up to the end point.
 You can set the respective needles for the continuous stitch color code.
 You can set the separate needles at the automatic connection.
 You can set the automatic needle turning (spinning function line).

5.4.7.15 General Tools (Settings to cancel knitting).


 The woven mark is canceled for the setting of the stitch color code line.
 Before canceling, you need to circle the judgment range first.

 When there is only a specified color code in the pattern line, the cancel knitting
flag is set.

158
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.16 General Tools (Clear the expansion indicator.


 The value of the 201-7 function line is automatically cleared.

5.4.7.17 General Tools (Automatically compress blank lines.


 Automatically compresses blank lines up to the end point.
 The criteria for judging blank lines are that the pattern, the intarsia, the jacquard
organization, and the function line view must all be blank lines.

5.4.7.18 General Tools (Import cnt files.


 First set the name of the cnt file to be imported.
 At least two files on the cnt and pat must exist.
 If there are ytx, prm files, they must also be placed in the same directory as the
cnt file.
 The number of machine systems for the pattern to be imported must match the
requirements of the cnt file.
 Pattern path: Select the directory where the pattern is located when you select
the import file, otherwise it is the directory where the cnt file was last selected.
 After the import is successful, the pattern will be displayed directly on the
current panel.
159
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The corresponding function lines have also been filled out, and the results after
compiling again will be the same as the cnt.

 Support for importing 000 files.


 Support for importing sin files.
 Support for importing hcd files.

5.4.7.19 General Tools (Import the current hcd.


 Directly import the hcd action file compiled by the current pattern.
 It is a quick implementation of the previous tool.

5.4.7.20 General Tools (locally imported hcd.


 Directly import the hcd action file compiled by the current pattern.
 You can specify the scope of the imported action.

160
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 You can see if the local action is correct.

5.4.7.21 General tools (go to back bed weaving.


 One button will convert the front bed proof pattern into a back bed proof
pattern.
 The converted pattern may need to be further processed:
 Bringing in the bottom of the yarn pattern;
 The bottom waste yarn weaving lock is changed to a loop;
 The organization of jacquard;
 Position setting of the yarn feeder;
 The color code and shaker of the user's huge concentration;
 The setting in the back jacquard;

161
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.22 General Tools (Import User Macros.


 Turn the user macro into a small image.
 At the same time, the user's macro page number is converted to a small page
number.
 For empty users, an empty thumbnail is generated for ease of use.

5.4.7.23 General Tools (Automatic Copy Degrees.


 Copy the degree to the function line such as speed, roll, sub-roll, sub-roller
switch.

162
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.24 conventional tools (automatic weaving speed.


 Copy the speed at the time of knitting to the speed function line when turning
the needle.

5.4.7.25 General tool (displays the yarn feeder parking point.


 The yarn feeder with one-sided pattern is automatically displayed to properly
park the spot.
 The yarn feeder direction of the single-sided pattern is automatically displayed.
 The yarn feeder number in the yarn feeder (2) cannot be used in the pattern.
 There must be no weaving in the pattern.
 Patterns with small images and users may not be processed properly.
 This function is not required in this system and is only for reference.Because the
system can be automatically brought in and out of the yarn feeder.

5.4.7.26 General tools (color scheme).


 Used to customize the color of the current color bar.
 After selecting the color scheme list, you can set it to the current color scheme
by using the “Apply” function.The plate system must be restarted for this setting
to work.
 The selected color scheme can be deleted with the "Delete" function, but the

163
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

default scheme cannot be deleted.


 Modify the selected color scheme color definition with the Save function.
 You can save the modified color scheme as a new color scheme.

5.4.7.27 General tools (partial separation.


 Used to separate the local weaving module.
 First circle a range that needs to be separated.
 Set the separated color.

164
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Click the "Separate" function.

 You can reply to the original pattern with the "Reply" function.
165
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.28 conventional tools (jaming trimming.


 Correct the side needle of the jacquard.
 Correction is only applied to the back form of empty needles, bags, bags (deer),
scorpio, grid, etc.
 The ij color code can be corrected directly in the pattern.
 The color code can be corrected in the intarsia view.
 Before the correction, the correction range needs to be selected, and the
non-edge is not corrected.
 Need to set the number of corrected side stitches.

 When 2 stitches are selected, the three colors and above jacquard can be
corrected by up to 3 stitches.
 The correct yarn feeder group information must be set before correction.

166
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Cross trimming: Interlacing trimming in 1x1, and trimming in trimming.

 Monochrome trimming: In the case where there is only one color in a row, the
secondary color method can be selected for trimming.

5.4.7.29 conventional tools (single-sided trimming.


 Correct the side pin on one side.
 Before the correction, the correction range needs to be selected, and the

167
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

non-edge is not corrected.


 Need to set the number of corrected side stitches.

 Allow small color code: Supports trimming of small color code.


 Trimming is done in a stealing manner. Please do not have other trimming
actions before trimming.

168
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Allow color code to be specified: Trimming is done by specifying the color code
instead of stealing.

5.4.7.30 General tools (for interchange.


 Convert the front bed movement and the back bed movement to each other.
 Turn each other forward and backward and turn forward.
 The correction range needs to be selected before the correction.

169
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.31 General tools (clear side.


 Correct the side pin color code action of the pattern.

 Front knitting, back knitting, front lifting, rear lifting, turning, clavicle: Specify the
color code action classification to be corrected.For example: 6# front weave rear
hanging color code meets both the front weaving and the rear hanging halves.
 Color: You can add or delete the color code number that needs to be corrected.
 Others: Correct the color code that meets the above two conditions.
 Weaving area: Only correct the lines with weaving action.
 Number of stitches: Specify the maximum number of stitches to be corrected
 New color code: The color code that meets the correction condition is converted
to a new color code.
 Before the correction, the correction range needs to be selected, and the
170
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

non-edge is not corrected.

5.4.7.32 General Tools (Module Correction.


 The correction range needs to be selected before the correction.
 You can specify the combination of the cord and bone that needs to be retained.
 Support for custom bones.
 It is possible to set whether or not the needle remains in the presence of the
cable color code.
 The unqualified bone color code will be replaced with a woven color code, and
the part may be either a front woven or a back woven bone color code, which
needs to be manually checked after replacement.You can also set it to a fixed
front or back weave color code in the color options.
 Only correct the color code on the braided line.
 The custom small color code can be corrected, which is generally used to fix the
small number of stitches.
 Multiple small color codes can be corrected at one time.
 It is possible to correct small maps with fixed multiple lines.

171
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Clavicle correction

172
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Small picture correction

173
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.33 General tools (v-neck split).


 Automatically rotate the left and right parts of the pattern to be executed in a
split manner;
 Set a selection box between the left and right parts to determine the left and
right parts and the height of the line.

174
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Merge: The situation when the split v-neck is merged into the un-deleted.The
reverse function for the splitting process.
 The function line of the merged area is reserved as the function line of the
left collar part.

5.4.7.34 General tools (Set the yarn feeder grade.


 First select the range of yarn feeders that need to be set in the yarn feeder
function line;
 Set the eyepiece value of each yarn feeder.
 It is recommended to use the yarn feeder degree function.

175
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.35 General Tools (automatically set the ic/ij tag.


 Automatically set the ic/ij mark of the 202-1 function line according to the ic/ij
color code usage in the pattern line.
 It is only effective for weaving forms such as intarsia, v-neck, jacquard, and
partial jacquard.

176
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.36 General Tools (Automatically generate ic/ij color code.


 It is only effective for weaving forms such as v-neck, intarsia, jacquard, and
partial jacquard.
 The ic/ij color code is generated in the pattern according to the view of the
177
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

intarsia view, the jacquard organization chart, and the like.


 If you are not familiar with how to use ic/ij color code, you can refer to this
function.

178
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Under normal circumstances, only one layer can be represented after conversion,
and the modification is convenient and the pattern is intuitive.

5.4.7.37 General Tools (Quickly extract small images.

179
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 First, select the color code range that needs to generate the thumbnail action;

 Then, set the type of small image to be generated, and the left side is the
complete small image;

 Ignore: generate a normal single-sided thumbnail;


 Other: Generate the corresponding jacquard reference thumbnail and need
to be modified twice.

 The generated small yarn feeder number defaults from 3#;


 It is also possible to set "Enable Intarsia" to generate the weaving form of the
Intarsia and its yarn feeder;

 Generate only color code lines: the small picture type setting is invalid, only the
first line of the small picture is generated;

180
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.38 General Tools (Simulation.


 Call to view the simulation function in cnt to generate a simulation map.

5.4.7.39 General tools (fill in the pattern area.


 Similar to the jacquard organization chart, but for all color codes, not the
jacquard color code or its area.

 Even lines add needles, odd lines receive needles: set whether to add the needle
to the left or right.
 Allow one stitch to be filled: Whether the needle for single needle is handled.

 The fill color code is related to the current color code of the color bar. The rules
are as follows:
 0# color code: set according to the edge color code of the fill area;
 Other color code: use color column color code to fill;

181
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.40 General Tools (Set the center mark.

 A sign is indicated when a number is entered.


 It is also possible to set a plurality of symbols, and the symbols can be separated
by spaces.
 You need to select the range of markers before setting the token.
 Support for multiple token types:

182
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Conventional tool - automatic shovel


 The range of the required shovel is selected in the frame, and the lifting action is
automatically generated according to the shovel method.

183
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Conventional tools - replacement pinning method


 Switch the pin collection method, such as ladder, ladder 2, etc.

After processing

Conventional Tools - Intarsia yarn feeder alignment


184
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Automatically align the intarsia yarn feeder to the shovel mode.

Conventional tool - regional separation


 Separate selected areas, copy function lines and other views

Conventional tool - automatic intarsia yarn feeder


 Automatically divide the intarsia yarn feeder area according to different colors,
185
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

which can be selected for use.

After

processing

5.4.7.41 Extension Tool (Fixed Jacquard Organization Chart).


 The local jacquard area in the jacquard organization chart is automatically
processed into a regular area.

 The jacquard backs in the correction area are the local jacquard forms specified

186
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

on the left.
 It can also be processed for ic/ij color code.

 Automatic: each connected jacquard area is individually corrected;


 The entire line: the ij color code of the entire line is corrected as a jacquard
area;
 Independent: Each ij color code in each line is corrected as a jacquard area.
 Whole block: Completion of the Unicom area and generation of the yarn
feeder drawing.
 Completing a single line: When there is a single side that is less than or
equal to the number of single lines, it is corrected as a jacquard area.

187
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.42 Extension Tool (Complete the Jacquard Organization Chart.


 Complement the jacquard organization chart.

 When the "left" even line is added and the odd line is closed, the right side is the
odd line plus the needle, and the even line is the needle.
 When the "Right" even line is selected and the odd line is closed, the left side is
the odd line plus the needle, and the even line is the needle.
 You need to select the processing range before completing the processing.
 This feature is only valid for jacquard organization charts.
 The completed color code is the current color code of the color bar.
 Except for the single needle: the addition and subtraction of 1 needle area is not
performed.

188
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.43 Extension Tool (Floating yarn feeder setting).

 A float yarn feeder for setting the yarn feeder in the intarsia.
 The yarn of the float yarn feeder will not be connected to its adjacent yarn.
189
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The steps are as follows:


 Select the range of the float yarn feeder in the summer page of the intarsia;
 Clicking the “New” button on the floating yarn feeder interface will display the
circled range in the list;
 Click to set the yarn feeder number of the float line.
 Multiple sets of float yarn feeders can be set.
 Double-click on the float yarn feeder list to display the corresponding selection
box on the Intarsia summer page.
 “New” can add a new column of yarn feeder settings.
 "Delete" can delete the specified line of float yarn feeder settings.
 Added clear and right +- lines.
Clear: One button clears all settings.
Right +-: Quickly increase the number of rows.

5.4.7.44 Extension Tool (Shrink/Needle).


 Used to set the automatic needle/needle row in the pattern.
 The steps are as follows:
 Circle the range of needles/additions needed in the pattern;
 Set the minimum effective needle/pin needle number;
 Only works on weaving lines.
 If there is only one line, setting the effective number of stitches does not
take effect.

190
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.45 Extension Tool (Automatic yarn feeder knotting.


 Automatically set the knotting of the yarn feeder.
 The steps are as follows:

191
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Set the range that needs to be knotted;


 Set the number of interval lines for knotting;
 Set the number of lines that do not need to be knotted;
 Set the direction of knotting;
 Set the yarn feeder that needs to be knotted;

 Number of interval lines: If the specified number of lines is exceeded, the knot is
192
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

made.
 Follow-up: The yarn feeder is used in the subsequent set number of rows
without knotting.
 Method: Set the line where the knot is located.

 Automatic: According to the above conditions, the knot is satisfied if the


requirements are met;
 Odd lines: knotted on odd lines;
 Even line: knot on even lines;
 Yarn feeder direction: the left yarn feeder is knotted on the right line, and
the right yarn feeder is knotted on the left line;
 Cross: knot each other on the upper and lower sides of the switching yarn
feeder.

 Cross (2): Similar to the cross, but the next yarn feeder is changed to two
lines in advance to start knotting.

193
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Auto + Cross: Combines automatic and cross-knotting.


 Select all: Set or cancel the yarn feeder that needs to be knotted.You can specify
the yarn feeder that needs to be knotted.

5.4.7.46 Extension Tool (Simulation.


 Call to view the simulation function in cnt to generate a simulation map.

5.4.7.47 Extension Tool (Local Simulation.


 The pattern within the specified range can be simulated.
 Circle the range before simulation.
 You can reduce the waiting time of the simulation and locate the area of ​ ​ the
simulation in one step.

194
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 If the range is not specified, it is consistent with the global simulation function.

5.4.7.48 Extension Tool (Import the current cnt.


 For requests compiled to cnt.
 You can import the compiled cnt action to see if the cnt action is reasonable.

5.4.7.49 Extension Tool (replace the start.


 Replace the number of segments before the current pattern.

195
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Regenerate the starting part such as the bottom rib.

 If there is a big body tag, replace it with the previous line.


 If there is no large body mark, increase the starting position directly before
the pattern.
 Collar: Mark whether the current pattern is a collar type
 The v-neck, round neck and non-left and right pieces are represented as
collar types;
 Sleeves, fake collars, and left and right pieces are indicated as non-collar
types;
 Use a yarn feeder for the body: Replace the head according to this plan.
 Use a yarn feeder on the v-neck: Replace the starter according to this scheme.

5.4.7.50 extension tool (pattern recovery.


 Restores the state of the pattern before it moves to an action.

196
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Avoid accidentally saving the pattern after the operation, and you cannot return
to the original pattern when you exit and then enter.
 Currently, the patterns supported by the 5 types of actions can be restored:
process single output, import HCD action, pattern expansion, 1x1 transformation,
correction of jacquard organization chart, and recording points.

 It can only be restored to the pattern before the last operation of each action.

5.4.7.51 Extension Tool (Loading Work Parameters.


 The working parameters in the wok, sav, hcd files can be loaded into the current
pattern.
 After the new generation system lower computer modifies the working
parameters, the modified working parameters can be loaded by this function.

5.4.7.52 Extension Tool (convert to hcd file.

197
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Convert the files of other systems to the hcd action file.


 The current conversion progress can be displayed during the conversion process.

 It has been supported to convert cnt/pat/prm, 000, sin/jac, and 001 to hcd files.
 When converting a 000 file to an hcd file, you also need to set partial conversion
parameters:

 Allow No. 18 yarn feeder: Allow the use of No. 18 yarn feeder for thread
removal.
 Filter blank lines: Automatically delete pairs of blank lines of action files.
 Check the yarn feeder parking: Check that the yarn feeder is parked in a

198
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

reasonable position.
 Print yarn feeder information: Output yarn feeder parking position
information during conversion in the conversion catalog.
 Replace the 18# yarn feeder: replace the No. 18 yarn feeder with other yarn
feeders for the thread removal function.0 means no replacement.
 Type of bottoming: Choose the right way to start.You can choose the
bottoming method that comes with the system, or you can choose the
starting method of the original pattern.
 When converting a sin file to an hcd file, you also need to set partial conversion
parameters:

 Shield sand mouth: directly filter this sand mouth action.


 Automatic sand spit: automatic kicking sand.(take in and out)
 Check the sand mouth parking: check the corresponding sand mouth
position.
 Filter blank lines: Select to filter empty lines and increase the bottom drop
function.
 Pat order: Sorts the pat line order output.
 Output debug information: intermediate results in the output or process so
199
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

that engineers can see the problems during the conversion process.
 You can specify a directory to batch convert the above convertible files.
 The pattern description can be viewed in the file properties.

5.4.7.53 Extension Tool (Set the pattern recovery point.


 Set the current pattern status to a record point that can be recovered. The next
time you select the pattern recovery, you can select the set point option to
restore.Similar to retaining the pattern fragment.Can be modified before the
user pattern.

5.4.7.54 template (expanding the pattern.

 First draw a pattern containing a small image (for details, see the instructions for
using the small image).

 An action prompt appears after performing the "Expand Pattern" function.

200
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Please pay attention to this message, you need to go back to the original pattern,
please cancel one step.
 Click "OK" to disable editing of the expanded pattern.
 Do not save the expanded pattern so that the original pattern containing the
small image is overwritten.
 After the small picture is drawn, it is not necessary to expand the small picture
function. The system can directly compile the pattern containing the small
picture.
 If the pattern has already been expanded, click again to expand the pattern and
you will be asked if you want to revert to the pre-expanded pattern.

 This recovery feature is still valid after the pattern save exits, but can only be
restored to the most recent pre-spread pattern.

5.4.7.55 template (partial expansion.


 Similar to the pattern expansion feature, but supports the expansion of a
partially specified range of small maps.
 Before the partial expansion, you need to select the range. If you do not select
the box, expand all.

201
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 It is convenient to find out if there is a problem in the thumbnail and whether


the expansion effect is in line with the expected situation.
 If the subsequent thumbnails are not completed, they can also be partially
expanded.

5.4.7.56 Template (Save the expanded file.


 After checking, a small image expansion file will be automatically generated at
compile time, and the file name is *_exp.pds.
 If there are any non-conformities to the expanded result pattern, you can further
modify the pattern file.

202
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.4.7.57 Template (delete the expanded empty line.


 You can delete empty lines that appear in the expanded pattern due to small
maps.

5.4.7.58 view copy menu


 Patterns can be copied to each other in each view.

5.4.7.59 background view menu


 You can set the base view as the base view in the current view.

203
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

204
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

5.5 context menu

The right-click menu of the pattern is shown below:

 Color: Get the color code of the current point of the mouse as the current color.
 Undo: Undo the previous step of the drawing operation, regardless of whether it
is the operation of the current drawing area.
 Resize: Adjust the size of the current artboard.
205
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Color selection: Select the desired color.


Click on the desired color to make a selection, and both the drawing area and
the color box are available.This function is mainly convenient for the operation of
copying multiple colors in the circle.The selected color can be used for processing
when the current color and the non-current color are pasted and copied.
 Reset centerline: Set the centerline of the current selection box.
First select a range.
Turn on the centerline switch.
After setting the center line, you can see the effect below.

 Copy, cut, paste: the basic processing of the image.


If the image source before pasting is not 256 colors, it will be automatically
converted to 256 colors for pasting.As shown below:

 Paste (including function line): Automatically paste the function line where the
pattern is copied.
 Paste (all views): Automatically paste the function line of the pattern when
copying, and other related views.Such as intarsia, jacquard organization chart.
 Paste (Insert): Automatically inserts all views into the current line, and you can
choose to align left or right when inserting.Equivalent to inserting a blank line
first, then pasting all the views, and aligning according to the position of the right
mouse button.
Left: Align the left side of the paste image to the mouse point;
206
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Right: Align the right side of the paste map to the mouse point;

Left (current line): Align the left side of the paste map to the left side of the
current line. The number of stitches beyond the valid range of the current line will be
ignored.
Right (current line): Align the left side of the paste map to the right side of the
current line. The number of stitches beyond the valid range of the current line will be
ignored.
Left (previous line): Align the left side of the pasted figure to the left side of the
previous line. The number of stitches beyond the valid range of the previous line will
be ignored.
Right side (previous line): Align the left side of the pasted figure to the right side
of the previous line. The number of stitches beyond the valid range of the previous
line will be ignored.

207
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Copy to: Copy the contents of the current selection box.

File: You can save the selected content to a bmp file or a pat file.The color code
value cannot be greater than 15 when copied to a pat file.
Pasteboard: Copy the selected content to the clipboard so that other systems
can edit it, such as drawing.
Intarsia, Jacquard, and Pattern: Copy the selected content to other pattern
views.At the same time, the selection box will also be positioned in other views.
 Select: Automatically generate a selection box.

208
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

All: The selection box is the entire pattern area.


Data: The selection box is the smallest area that contains all valid data.
Current data: The selection box is the smallest area that contains all the valid
data for the mouse point.
The shortcut key is "[".
Color: The selection box is the smallest area that contains all current colors (all
selected colors).
Current color: The selection box is the smallest area that contains all valid data
for the color of the mouse point.
The shortcut key is "]".
 Settings: Set the display switch and drawing parameters.
 Template: Select the template saved by the system for drawing.
 Standard: Implement the input of the process order.
 Custom: Select a custom template that has been initialized by the system.

209
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

If the s_2*2 rib is selected, a dialog box appears.

The size of the pattern (height, width) can be entered according to the user's
needs.
 You can also choose the appropriate template in Customize (Template
Management).

 After saving the custom template, be sure to save the custom template to a file
through the template export function, so as not to be overwritten when the
system is upgraded.

210
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Type: After selecting a different type, all templates under that type will be listed
in the template list.
Display System Template: Displays the template that comes with the plate
making system.
Show personal template: Show templates that you have added yourself.
Filter: Automatically filters the module containing the input characters based on
the module name.
 The template file has the suffix tpl.
 The export function is divided into three categories: all, type, and selection.

 The imported template file can be imported via the import function.
All new templates will be added to the system when appending the import.
When you clear the import, all new templates will be added to the system after
all custom templates have been deleted.
Overlay the template with the same name, for the template with the same name,
it will be automatically overwritten instead of being added again.
 Scheme list: Automatically list the template files in the scheme directory.
Double-click the scheme file to automatically import all the modules of the
template.
The customized scenario save directory is set in the advanced parameters.
Append import when double-clicking: Set whether to perform import in append
mode or clear mode.
 Management: Select the module in the template list and click the right mouse
button to process the existing module.

211
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Delete: You can delete an existing module, but you cannot delete the system's
own module.
Rename: Rename the name of the existing module.

Move to: Move existing modules to other categories.

Whether it is often displayed: The module is listed in the right-click menu.


You can also import template files in a local file:

 The local template file has the suffix tpf.


 It can be saved as a local file by the template save function.

Template save
As shown in the figure, the front scales save it as a template step

212
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Right click on the template - save:

After entering the type and name.


Select "Is it always visible": It will be displayed in the list of menus when the
template is selected.
Select "Do you want to include a function line": The function line portion is also
saved when the module is saved.For templates that have saved function lines, the
function lines are also automatically imported during import.
Select Base Unit: You will be asked to enter the final size of the imported drawing
when you export the template.
Select "Overwrite the same name template": the template with the same name
will be automatically overwritten instead of continuing to add.
After entering "file", the module is saved to the specified file, and if the file is
empty, it is saved to the system.

213
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The local template file has the suffix tpf.


 Template files saved to the local can be used in different places by file copying.
If it is saved to the system, it can be read in the customization after saving, as
follows

File template
Right-click on the template - file, you can import bmp, jpg, pnp, tif, gif and other
image files into the artboard, which can be processed during the import process.
When importing, if the color of the file is greater than 256 colors, it will be
automatically converted to 256 colors.The figure below shows the pattern after
import.

214
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The following is the original selection interface and the original image:

As shown above, the selected file size is 222 × 222, and the color is 24-bit true
color.
You can also adjust the pattern to a few color maps instead of 256 colors by
multi-value transformation.
215
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Binary transformation: convert the original image into two color codes (0, 1).
 Three transformation parameters can be fine-tuned during the adjustment
process.

 Three-value transformation: convert the original image into three color codes (0,
1, 2).

 Four-value transformation: convert the original image into four color codes (0, 1,
2, 3).

216
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Five-value transformation: convert the original image into five color codes (0, 1,
2, 3, 4).
 Six-value transformation: Convert the original image to six color codes (0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5).
 Seven-value transformation: Convert the original image to seven color codes (0,
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).
 You can choose another file type to convert.

Select “Island Fine Pattern File” to import the bmp image exported from the
Island Refined System into the system. At this time, the coil color code will be
automatically converted.
 256-color graphics do not support transform processing.
 New Width, New Height: Automatically scales the image to the specified size as
the color changes.
 Send all files to: Send all files related to the current pattern to the u disk or the
specified directory.

217
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Custom: You need to manually select the directory to be sent to.


 Pattern (k:): sent to the root directory of the u disk.
The pattern before sending must be saved.

 Send the machine file to: Send the file related to the current pattern to the u
disk or the specified directory, and operate as above.
The pattern before sending must be compiled.
It is recommended to use this function to copy the files on the machine to avoid
missing files.

 Attribute: The right-click attribute function of the drawing tool.

218
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

6. hot key

The system uses the functions of the function keys f1 - f12 in the form of
function keys f1 - f12 directly below the drawing area, and there are Chinese prompts,
the specific meanings are:
F1: Open the operating instructions.
F2: Switch the graphic view to the origin of the drawing coordinates, that is, the
origin of the drawing area in the lower left corner (1:1)
F3: Switch the view, switch the drawing page from the basic page (bmp) to the
intarsia page (ina) and then switch to the jacquard organization chart, the jacquard
area map, the jacquard yarn feeder, and cycle.The basic page (bmp) is the basic
weaving information, and the color of this page represents the meaning of the color
block, such as including weaving, hanging, turning, and the like.Intarsia page (ina),
that is, jacquard information, the color block of this page can not be greater than 18,
generally need 2, 3, 4 colors such as jacquard or v-neck or intarsia, defined on this
page.When the jacquard is used, the color block represents the jacquard color; when
the v-neck and the intarsia are in summer, the color block represents the yarn feeder
number.The jacquard organization chart is the back tissue map of the jacquard.The
jacquard area map is used to distinguish two adjacent jacquards.The jacquard yarn
feeder diagram is a definition map of the jacquard yarn feeder group when the
partial jacquard is used.
F4: Process order.
F5: Take the previous color block (minus) of the current color block.For example, the
current color block is 8. After pressing the f5 key, the color block is changed to the
7th color block, and the continuous pressing is decremented until the 255 color
block.
F6 : Take the next color block of the current color (plus).
F7: Switch analog display and switch.
F8: Switch the prompt information display and switch.
F9: Switch the grid display and turn off the switch.
219
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

F10: Maximum magnification and minimum magnification switching (20x and 1x


switching), 32x if it is a large icon.
F11: Reduce the graphics, press once, zoom out by 1 (minimum 1:1).With the scroll
wheel effect, pull down.
F12: Enlarge the graph (maximum 32:1), press the button once and expand it by 1
time.With the roller effect, pull up.
Letter: Select the drawing tool.
Number: Select the weave color code.
Alt+f1: Displays the centerline.
Alt+f2: Symmetrical drawing.
Alt+f3: File upload.
Alt+f4: File download.
Alt+f5: color selection.
Alt+f6: Color mask.
Alt+f7: Color search.
Alt+f8: Module replacement.
Alt+f9: Image processing.
Alt+f10: Copy the current color.
Alt+f11: Copy non-current colors.
Alt+f12: Copy all colors.
Alt + left mouse button: color.
Shift+mouse: Display the contents of the thumbnail.

220
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

CTRL+Fn: Custom machine menu function.


Ctrl+number: deletes the number of rows and columns at a time.
Alt+number: Sets the style of the brush brush.
Ctrl+←: Positions the left border of the active pattern on the current line.
Ctrl+→: Positions the right border of the active pattern on the current line.
Ctrl+↑: Positions the upper boundary of the active pattern on the current column.
Ctrl+↓: Positions the lower boundary of the active pattern on the current column.
Shift+←: Positions to the left edge of the view.
Shift+→: Positions to the right border of the view.
Shift+↑: Positions to the upper boundary of the view.
Shift+↓: Positions to the lower boundary of the view.
Tab: Switches to the last selected color.
PgUp: Move the view up quickly.
PgDn: Move the view down quickly.
Home: Quickly move the view to the left.
End: Move the view to the right quickly.
Space + Mouse: Moves the view in eight directions depending on the position of the
view in which the mouse is located.
221
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Sub-keyboard: A keypad that is supported by Hengqiang to support fast input.

Interval (`) minus (-) Plus (+): Positioning shortcuts.


Backslash (\): Generates a maximized selection box based on the location.
Left bracket ([): A selection box that generates the current data.
Right bracket (]): Generates a selection box for the current color.
Decimal point (.): Positions the function line view splitter bar.

222
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Ctrl + left mouse button: locate the small image where the color code of the small
image is located.
Ctrl + right mouse button: Go back to the previous "ctrl + left mouse button" click
position.

223
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

7. Function line drawing area, indicator bar


The function line drawing area is an auxiliary information (function line l)
describing the first drawing area, and corresponds one-to-one on the line.If the
necessary information is not defined on the function line drawing area, the
compilation system will not be able to interpret the information in the first drawing
area.

Function line drawing area

As shown in the figure above, there are a total of 36 functional line drawing areas,
which are defined as 201-236.

7.1 Function Line Table

Instru L Control content description Remar


ction ks
windo
w
saving Indicates that the current
line of the first drawing area When
is executed cyclically to a using
certain line, and the number the
of cycles is the value filled in saving
the second drawing area.The functi
1 L201 starting point for saving on,
must be an odd number of the
lines, and the ending point machi
must be an even number of ne
lines. needs

224
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

1-199 to
copy
(1-199): Set saving 1...
the
0: Cancel saving 1
prm
(1-199): Set saving 2...
file.
0: Cancel saving 2
Cancel module identification For
Set module identification the
Cancel module page number definit
Set module page number ion
Cancel left and right pan and
Set left and right pan use of
Cancel the number of offset modul
stitches es
Set the number of offset
stitches

1-64: User macro


User macro 99: ic / ij color code
101: Weave the left side first
102: Weave the right side
first
103: Weave the left side first
(ic/ij)
104: Weave the right side
first (ic/ij)
2 L202 111-115: v collar split
Internally weaved in the
way of v-neck splitting, the
default weave the left side
121-125: v-collar (ic/ij)

Foresight: no work
Indicates the current line of
the drawing area. If a color
Cancel knitting block has information of
knitting and turning, the
color only represents the

225
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

turning and cancels the


knitting action.When the
needle is indicated, the color
code is interpreted in the
meaning of the needle, and
3 L203 the needle, the weave, and
the like are no longer
indicated.
0: Reset cancels weaving
1: setting to cancel the
weaving
2: Set the shrink needle (1)
3: Set the shrink needle (2)
4: Set the shrink needle (3)
5: Set the shrink needle (4)
6: Set the shrink needle (5)
7: Set the shrink needle (6)
8: Set the shrink needle (7)
9: Set the shrink needle (8)
11: Automatic shrink needle
12: Automatic needle
addition
13: Automatic needle
reduction (1) (1x1)
14: Automatic needle
reduction (4) (1x1)
21: Set the needle (1)
22: Set the needle (2)
Refers to the up and down
direction, cancel the
automatic turning action.For
Prohibit connection example, the current line is
the front bed weaving, and
the next line is the back bed
4 L204 weaving. Generally, it is
necessary to automatically
insert the front and back
movements to unwind the
front bed coil and then hang
it to the back bed knitting
needle.

226
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

0: Reset forbidden link


1: Setting a forbidden link
0: Allow back station
connection
1: Prohibit backstage
connection

Set whether to connect


between the upper and
lower jacquard backs.
Insert a blank action after
the current line.
0: Reset blank line
1: Insert a blank line
Blank line 2: Eliminate blank lines
11: The height of the front
knitting needle is the height
of the needle
12: The height of the needle
after the knitting is the
height of the needle
21: Follow the method of
5 L205 kicking the yarn feeder
22: Follow with the
introduction of the intarsia
to bring in and out
23: After 1x1 weaving
method follows
 It is an extension of the
[follow mode] of the
compile option and can
be set to the line.
 Generally, it can be set
to 22 in the lead-in area.
41: Press the yarn feeder to
turn the needle, and the
yarn feeder rotates
immediately after the yarn
feeder is woven, which is
generally used for jacquard.
51: Continue the jacquard
back, generally used for
sesame point jacquard
227
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

backstage change line

61: Turning the needle line


(188.189)
Weaving peers use 188 189
color code to perform
needle crimping
62: Braided pressure line
(188.189)
After the needle is turned,
the line is pressed with
188.189 color code.
99: Auxiliary mark line: Used
to mark some manually
inserted lines.For example,
the yarn feeder is brought in
and taken out, and the flat
position is taken up.The
marker line does not
participate in the calculation
of automatic actions such as
jacquard bottoming.
98: Non-auxiliary mark line:
Used to mark between
non-auxiliary lines.
6 L206 Program resource Reserv
ed
Degree Define the knitting degree of
the current line.
1-32P
32: Degree (when the front
bed is woven)
7 L207 32: Degree (when the bed is
weaved)
32: Degree (reserved)
32: Degree (reserved)
32: Degree (when part of the
jacquard)
32: Degree (when jacquard
hanging)
228
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

32: Degree (when turning)


16: degree (corrected)
Define the shaker
information of the current
Shaker line, the direction of the
shaker, the number of
shakers, the shaker position,
etc.
0: right (default)
1: left
8 L208 0-15: Number of stitches

0: Cancel
1:* (shift 1/2 pin to the left)
2:+
3:-
0: Cancel
1: more than 1 pin
2: More than 1/2 stitch
0: standard speed
1: medium speed
2: low speed
Define the head speed at the
speed time of the current knitting
9 L209 and the head running speed
when turning the needle
1-32P
24: speed during weaving
24: Speed ​ ​ when turning
the needle
Roll Defines the speed of the
main roller roll of the
10 L210 current line. Lord
1-32P Rolla
(0-32): Rolling cloth when
weaving
(0-32): Rolling when turning
the needle
Roller switch: set the
machine to automatically
open and close once when
the machine is woven to the
current line.
229
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Secondary roll Define the current


secondary roller roll speed. Deput
11 L211 1-32P
y
(0-32): sub-rolling cloth
when weaving roller
(0-32): the secondary roll
when turning the needle
(0-32): secondary winding
12 L212 Secondary roll switch
switch during weaving
(0-32): Sub-roller switch
when turning the needle
(0-32): the bottom plate is
13 L213 Bottom plate Startin
rolled during weaving
(0-32): the bottom plate is
g plate
rolled when the needle is
turned
(0-32): Other rolls when
14 L214 Other rolls Reserv
weaving
(0-32): Other rolls when
ed
turning
Defines the number of
15 L215 Gyro stitches in the weaving area
when the current head is
swung.
1-4P
Weave form Define the weave of the
jacquard area.
2: one line 2 system
3: One line 3 system
4: One line 4 system
6: n line n system (1)
7: n line n system (2)

81: The knitting


Intarsia pattern defining
the current line is
16 L216 Intarsia, and the
color block
number
represents the
yarn feeder
number, and it is
not necessary to
specify the yarn
230
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

feeder group.
1. Ordinary pout
2. Intarsia
bobbin
3. Multi-piece
weaving

91:V Define the current


collar weave as the
v-neck, where the
color number
represents the
yarn feeder
number without
specifying the
yarn feeder set.
Single yarn feeder
2. Double yarn
feeder
1: empty
needle
2: Select all
3:1X1—A
4:1X1—B
5: Deer
21:2 color 6: bag
jacquard 7: Bag (deer)
31:3 color (effective for 171
jacquard 3 colors or suppo
more)
Weave form 41:4 color rts
8:1x1 days
jacquard
9:1x2 days partial
51:5 color 10:1x3 days
jacquard 11:1x4 days jacqua
61:6 color 12:1x5 days rd
jacquard 13:1X1X2
14:1X3X2 forms
71:
15:1X5X2 that
Multicolor
16: user
16 L216 jacquard imple
17:1X2X2
18: Grid (can ment
121 -171: replace bag +
Partial deer) multip
jacquard 19: Custom le
231
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

172: 20: bag blocks


Multicolor (tuck)
21:1X1—C on a
partial
22:1X1—D single
jacquard of
23:1x6 days
intarsia yarn 24:1x7 days line.
feeder 25:1x8 days
173: Intarsia
added yarn
partial
jacquard

64: yarn feeder group system

Set the number of yarn feeder


segments during jacquard and
multi-color jacquard.
The v-neck and the intarsia can also
be set with a wide yarn feeder.

99: Specify the yarn feeder group:


When the 171 multi-color partial
jacquard is used, all the yarn feeders
in the current yarn feeder group are
forced to participate in the jacquard.
1: Cancel the current line of intarsia
When using the basic
pattern (weaving, hanging,
turning, etc.) represented by
the drawing area, you need
Yarn feeder 1 to define the yarn feeder
number to be set in the
knitting system 1 and system
232
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

2 here.

17 L217

(0-18): System-1...
(0-18): System-2...
(0-18): System-3...
0: no
1: the right side of the nose
2: left head of the machine
(0-18): Knotted (1)...

(0-18): Knotted (2)...

0: Unlock
1: locking system 1
2: locking system 2
3: locking system 3
4: locking system 4
11: Specify the system
21: Disable left system (1)
22: Disable left system (2)
23: Disable the right system
(1)
24: Disable the right system
(2)

When the weaving machine The


Yarn feeder 2
system 1 or system 2
reset
requires double yarn feeder
weaving, it is necessary to yarn

18 L218 define the yarn feeder feeder


number of the other yarn
functi
feeder here.

233
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

(0-18): System-1 on line


(0-18): System-2
is
(0-18): System-3
(0-18): Reset yarn feeder used
(1)... to
(0-18): Reset the yarn feeder
deflec
(2)...
(0-18): Reset the yarn feeder t the
(3)... intarsi
(0-18): Reset the yarn feeder a yarn
(4)...
feeder
.
When using the bottom
plate system, with the
scissors clip function, it is
defined here.
(0-4): Clip line
(0-4): pay line
(0-18): Yarn out 1
(0-18): Yarn out 2
Clip line (0-18): Yarn out 3
(0-4): scissors
Only
13/14/23/24: Clip
line for
19 L219 use
(combination clip clamping
with
action) backpl
ane
12/13/14/23/24/34:
functi
Discharge line (combination on
syste
clip release action)

234
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

1: Set the bottom plate ms


action: It means that the
previous pattern is the base
bottom pattern.At this time,
the bottoming action of the
bottom pattern is not set by
the system, but is designed
by the individual.
2: Automatically bring in the
yarn: the bottom plate is
automatically pressed and
brought in.
8: Set the big body mark:
used to mark the big body
start line.
11: Set the blowing action:
blow.
21: Set the yarn feeder
alignment (end): The roller
machine ends to
automatically align the yarn
feeder position.
22: Set the yarn feeder
alignment (start):
The roller machine begins to
automatically align the
position of the yarn feeder.
Use the Sonic Weaving
Accessibility feature, defined
here.
Presser foot enable: The
Presser foot enable
specified presser foot does Sheng
not work. ke

235
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

(0-16): when segme


Raw gram
nt is
20 L220 weaving filled
(0-16): Raw grams when in
here
turning
(0-1): Presser foot enable
during weaving
(0-1): Presser foot enable
when turning
(0-5): Trick 2 degree
segment setting
(0-18): System-6...
Define the advance amount
when the yarn feeder is
Yarn feeder parking point parked. Adjust this amount
to calibrate the proper
21 L221 position of the yarn feeder
drop point.
(0-8): yarn feeder parking
point
0: Cancel parking
1: set parking
Bring in and out of the
parking spot:
Specifies the number of
parking points that are
brought in and out.
End Set the process end point
22 L222 0: End of reset
1: End of setting

Set both sides, turn the


needle + weave
Start both sides, turn the 0: Do not start the two sides
of the needle + weave

236
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

needle + weave 1: start the two sides of the


needle + weave
23 L223
(This function can be
combined with four flat
needles)
2: special pin
(The order is effective)
The specified needle turning
action is performed in the
direction of the required
head:
101: the right side of the
nose
102: left head of the
machine
Due to the precision of the
machine or the quality of
the needle, when the needle
24 L224 Turn the needle is to be continuously turned,
the effect is often poor. If
separately the needle is separately
turned here, it will achieve 1
gap.
0: Do not enable separate
needles
Turn the needle 1: enable separate needle
2: Enable separate needles
separately
(2)
24 L224 3: Enable 2x2 turn
4: Enable 2x2 turn (2)
5: Enable needle separation
6: Enable needle separation
(2)
7: Enable separate needles
(except straight)
8: Enable 2x2 turn (except
straight)
11: Enable separate needles
(inside)

237
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

12: Enable separate needles


(inside) (2)
15: Enable pin separation
(inside)
16:Enable pin separation
(inside) (2)
17: Enable separate needles
(inside) (except straight)
The inner turning needle is
only suitable for the color of
the needle
0: Cancel the automatic
needle
1: before turning back,
before turning back
2: After turning back,
turning forward
This feature is only available
for multi-color jacquard.
After weaving this line,
Jacquard insert a 1 sill.To do this, the
yarn feeder to be carried
with the eyepiece needs to
be defined in the yarn
feeder group, and the color
of the yarn is indicated by Lai
card
25 L225 the number 9 color.
Work
0: no jacquard
can
1: 1*1 tuck before and after
2: Full and rear eyes
3: The first 1*1 tuck
4: After 1*1 tuck
5: Front tuck
6: After the lifting
7:1*1 idling
8: 1*2 tuck before and after
9: 1*3 hanging heads before
and after

238
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

10: 1*4 tuck before and


after
11: 1*1 full tuck before and
after
Tuck (b): Execute in the
opposite direction from the
previous tangle.Misplaced
execution
Eye-catching switch: When
two or more rows of slings
appear on one stitch due to
the need of weaving, the
eye-catching switch can be
set on the subsequent line
to achieve the hanging
result.At this time, there can
only be a hanging needle in
the knitting line.
Right row weaving When possible, the yarn
feeder is woven in the right
direction to replace the
knitting option "yarn yarn
26 L226 weaving method"

Set all right lines: Force all


yarn feeders to start knitting
optimization on the right
line.

Left row weaving When possible, the yarn


feeder is woven in the left
direction to replace the
knitting option "yarn yarn
27 L227 weaving method"

Set all left lines: Force all


yarn feeders to start knitting
optimization.

239
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

After the weaving form such


as intarsia or partial
Take the right line
jacquard is completed, the
inner yarn feeder can be
28 L228 designated to be taken to
the right. When the system
automatically brings out the
direction opposite to the
actual requirements, the
direction can be specified
here.

Take the left line After the weaving form such


as intarsia or partial
jacquard is completed, the
29 L229 inner yarn feeder can be
designated to be taken out
to the left. When the system
automatically brings out the
direction opposite to the
actual requirements, the
direction can be specified
here.
30 Reserv
ed
31 Reserv
ed
Tightly edited Set whether the coarse
knitting (weaving two
segments) and the tight
hanging (dip two segments)
32 L332 color code perform tight
knitting and loose lifting.
It is mainly suitable for
models where both stations
are executed. Normal
machines generally use only
one type of station, and you
do not need to use this
240
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

function line for designation.

Yarn mouth level group: Set


the page number in the yarn
Degree (2)
feeder setting.Indicates that
the yarn feeder in the
33 L333 current line is executed in
the front and back of the
page.
Set the ah degree: For the
double-layer machine,
forcibly specify the ah bit
work to be variable
excessive.Automatic
switching is not performed.
Raw g 2 Set the needle before
knitting: Automatically insert
the needle before the
34 L334 knitting operation.
Set the needle before
turning the needle: Specify
the needle insertion action
before the needle is turned.
35 L335 Forced merger Forced consolidation of safe
needle rows
36 Reserv
ed

241
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Back weave type (l216) description

Organizati Back weave pattern


on type
1 Empty needle (non-woven on the back) (woven single-sided with
dotted jacquard)
2 Select all (back full weave)
3 1x1-A (back 1x1 cross weaving) (back weaving 2.4.6 re-weaving 1.3.5)
4 1x1-B (back 1x1 cross weave) (back weaving 1.3.5 re-weaving 2.4.6)
5 Deer (the back is stitched with a 1-pin (n-1) stitch, the back is twill, n is
the jacquard color
6 Bag (air layer jacquard)
7 Bag (deer) (air layer jacquard)
8 1x1 day 竺 (1 needle on the back weave 1 needle)
9 1x2 day 竺 (1 needle on the back weave 2 needles)
10 1x3 days 竺 (1 needle on the back weave 3 needles)
11 1x4 days 竺 (1 needle on the back weave 4 needles)
12 1x5 days 竺 (1 needle on the back weave 5 needles)
13 1x1x2 day 竺 (1 needle on the back weave 3 needles)
14 1x3x2 day 竺 (1 needle on the back weave 7 needles)
15 1x5x2 days (11 needles on the back weave 11 needles)
16 User (using "back jacquard")
17 1x2x2 day 竺 (1 needle on the back weave 5 needles)
18 Grid (bag deer)
19 customize
20 Bag (tuck)
21 1x1-C (same as 1x1-A), generally used for back-station alignment in
V-neck dismantling jacquard
22 1x1-D (same as 1x1-B), generally used for back-station alignment in
V-neck split jacquard
23 1x6 days 竺 (1 needle on the back weave 6 needles)
24 1x7 days (the back is woven with 1 needle and 7 needles)
25 1x8 days 竺 (1 needle on the back weave 8 needles)
26 Bag (thickness)

242
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 When it is a custom form, the front bed needle drawing is drawn in the intarsia,
and the rear bed needle drawing is drawn in the jacquard organization chart,
requiring no long dashed lines.
 The back of the bag (deer) is recommended to be replaced by a grid, or the
compile time setting is ticked "Try new backstage".
 1x1x2 days is recommended to replace with 1x1 days, but you need to tick "Try
new backstage" when compiling, you can support 1x1 day effect of three colors
and above.Other Tianzhu backstage is the same.
 The bag (tuck) is only used for three-color jacquard.
 The bag (thickness) is only suitable for double-layer machine models.

When the left mouse button clicks on the corresponding function in the function line
indication window, the function line 1 corresponding to the function line drawing
area can be activated, and the first line on the left side is the control bar represented
by the l function line.

243
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

7.2 Partial function line operation instructions

7.2.1 Savings (l201)


When the user is drawing, some picture areas are cyclic, and the user can set a
saving loop on this function line.
Indicates that the current line of the first drawing area is executed cyclically to a
certain line, and the number of cycles is the value filled in the drawing area of
​ ​ the function line.
Rotate 10 times as shown below, set as follows

 The starting point for saving must be the odd line of cnt, and the ending
point must be the even line of cnt.
 When the two savings are connected and the same number of times, they
must be set separately for internal savings and external savings.

Module identification 12 13 can be used to preserve pattern module corrections


Specific use method: Before saving the pattern, draw the module correction graphic
above the base image.
12 identifies the correction module area, and 13 identifies the modified replacement
module.

244
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

As shown below

After the pattern is retained, the incomplete module will be automatically


replaced.The following is a comparison chart.

245
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

7.2.2 User Macro (l202)


When users are designing a computer horizontal mechanism, they often involve
repeated use of a series of weaving actions, which can be easily represented by a
color code.The user macro is the software that batches the color code representing
these self-defined actions. The color code processed by the user is between 120 and
183, which is convenient for the user to use in the plate making software.
After giving the user a macro definition, the action file is automatically generated,
and the user color code is automatically compiled into a split action.
The 120-183 color code that is not set by the user macro function line will be
treated as a small color code.
User macro instructions:
Open: Click on the menu bar flat knitting machine - user macro

246
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Open the user editor as shown

below
Select the current drawing color code in the color code column. When the
mouse clicks on the drawing area on the left side, the knitting motion represented by
the “current color code” will be displayed in the corresponding square of the drawing
area.
When the mouse clicks on the function line area on the right, the color of the
"current color code" will be displayed in the corresponding square of the function
line area.
To turn the page, you can click "+, -" to turn the page, or you can click the first
page to perform the input operation to adjust to the specified page.

The copy function allows you to copy the user-defined data of the current page
to another page.

Clear the user-defined data of the current page by the clear function.

247
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

First define the user macro color code and function line in the main drawing area.
User macro color code range (120-183)
As shown below

The above operation is a single needle method with a 5-pin flat.The user can set the
flat mode in the user according to the usage habits.
Its compiled effect is the same as the following figure

248
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

7.2.3ic/ij color code (l202)


Specify the enable ic/ij color code function, for the following color code, no
longer use the small color code but ic/ij color code to explain the use:
131~146(ic): used to specify the yarn feeder back knitting operation on one side;
151~166(ic): used for the knitting operation of the specified yarn feeder on one
side;
201~216(ic): a four-flat knitting operation for a specified yarn feeder on one
side;
167~182(ij): The specified yarn feeder front weaving action for jacquard.
The ij color code range represents a jacquard, and the ic color code range
represents a single side.

The specific pattern action can be confirmed by the pattern expansion function.

249
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

For the case of other actions such as picking holes, twisting flowers, etc., you can
directly use the color code of these actions inside the ic/ij color code. If the specific
program explanation is normal, you can continue to see the expanded picture to
confirm:

250
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

If these other action color codes are combined at different ic/ij color codes, it
will cause ambiguity in the analysis of the program. If there are parsing errors, these
color codes can be drawn on the intarsia chart.

In the case of the above picture, which 20# color code is used to weave, 3# or 5#
yarn feeder? Is it ic single-sided, or ij jacquard? There will be ambiguity here, we
need to put 20 in both cases. #色码画在引塔夏图.

Weave the left side first / weave the right side first: For the pattern of the left
and right 2 half movements, you can specify the left side first weave or the right side
first weave.

251
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

V-neck split: For the left and right movements, you can split the weave in the
v-neck. By default, the left piece is knitted.
 V-collar (2): two lines and one dismantle;
 V-collar (4): four lines and one dismantle;
 V-collar (6): six rows and one demolition;
 V-collar (8): eight rows and one demolition;
 V-collar (a): the whole one is removed;

252
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The yarn feeders on the left and right sides of one side can be filled in 217-1
and 217-2, and the wide yarn feeders are filled in 217-1 and 218-2
respectively;
 Can also be used in the form of 81-1 and small maps.

7.2.4 Cancel the weaving - shrink needle (l203)


The color codes 101, 102 are used to shrink the needle to the right, and 103, 104
are used to reduce the needle to the left.The specific implementation method is
related to the method of shrinking the needle you choose, and has different
meanings in different ways of shrinking the needle.
The line of the 16th color has no practical meaning, and is mainly used to clearly
show where the needle row is.
By default, the stitching line is canceled, and in addition to these
pinch color codes, only the front or back weave color code can be used,
and it cannot be mixed.
253
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Shrink needle (1)


The color codes 101, 102 are used to shrink the needle to the right, and the two
color codes must be used continuously, indicating that the 102 color codes overlap to
the 101 color code, and the 102 color code numbers must be an integer multiple of
the 101 color code numbers, and the overlapping rule is as follows.

The color codes 103, 104 are used to reduce the needle to the left, and the two
color codes must be used continuously, indicating that the 104 color code is
overlapped to the 103 color code, and the 104 color code number must be an
integral multiple of the 103 color code number, and the overlapping rule is as
follows.

The reduced needle (1) is drawn as follows, and the other thumbnail
images are similar.

254
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Shrink needle (2)


If you want to make the needle (1) a folding effect, you can use the
needle (2).
The color codes 101, 102 are used to shrink the needle to the right, and the two
color codes must be used continuously, indicating that the 102 color codes overlap to
the 101 color code, and the 102 color code numbers must be twice the number of
the 101 color codes.
The color codes 103, 104 are used to reduce the needle to the left, and the two
color codes must be used continuously, indicating that the 104 color codes overlap to
the 103 color codes, and the 104 color code numbers must be twice the number of
103 color codes.
The overlapping rules are as

follows:

 Shrink needle (3)


For each time a needle is retracted, 102 means that the needle is
retracted to the right, and 104 means that the needle is retracted to the
left.
The 102 color number indicates that the needle position is overlapped
to the right by the needle on the left side thereof.
The 104 color number indicates that the needle position is overlapped
to the left by the needle on the right side thereof.

255
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Please refer to the simulation diagram for the specific reduction


effect.
 Shrink needle (4)
101, 102 are used for the left contraction, and 103, 104 are used for
the right contraction.

Each color code is reduced by one stitch.Please refer to the simulation


diagram for the specific reduction effect.
 Two color codes of the same number are used at the same time and
can be used for 1*1 shrink stitches.
 Four the same color code are used at the same time and can be used
for 2*2 shrink stitches.
 The position of the pinch color code is the position of the
stitches.
 The difference between 101 and 102 is that the action sequence of
the needles is reversed to achieve different stitching effects.

256
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Shrink needle (5)


The color codes 101, 102 are used for the left pinch, and the two color codes
must be used at intervals. The color code must have a front or back weave color
code.The color code 101 indicates that the needle is contracted to the right, and the
color code 102 is contracted to the left by one stitch.The two color codes of 101 and
102 can be reduced to the same needle.The overlapping rules are as follows.

The color codes 103, 104 are used for the right contraction, and the two color
codes must be used at intervals. The color code must have a front or back weave
color code.The color code 103 indicates that the needle is retracted to the left, and
the color code 104 is retracted to the right.The two color codes 103, 104 can be
reduced to the same needle.The overlap rule is similar to the above.

Please refer to the simulation diagram for the specific reduction


effect.
 Shrink needle (6)

257
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

For a needle in the case of 2x2, 102 means a needle to the right, and
104 means a needle to the left.
The number of stitches per stitch is 4 stitches.

Please refer to the simulation diagram for the specific reduction


effect.
 Shrink needle (7)
101, 102 are used for the left contraction, and 103, 104 are used for
the right contraction.

Each color code is reduced by two stitches.Please refer to the


simulation diagram for the specific reduction effect.
 The position of the pinch color code is the position of the
stitches.
 The difference between 101 and 102 is that the action sequence of
the needles is reversed to achieve different stitching effects.

258
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Shrink needle (8)


101, 102 are used for the left contraction, and 103, 104 are used for
the right contraction.
Each color code is reduced by one stitch.Please refer to the simulation
diagram for the specific reduction effect.
 The position of the shrink stitch color code is the position where
the stitches are one stitch away.
 The difference between 101 and 102 is that the action sequence of
the needles is reversed to achieve different stitching effects.

 Shrinking needle (9)

259
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Each of the reduced needle marks is reduced by one stitch and 101 102
103 104 is marked with a stitched position.Support both the left and right
sides of the needle
 101 102 is the left contraction, 102 is overlapped by the left
needle, and 101 is overlapped by the right needle.
 103 104 is the right needle, 104 is occupied by the right needle,
103 is overlapped by the left needle
Note that only 102 104 can be used in the middle position, mainly to
achieve the effect of stacking 2 edges.
Identification method

Expand effect

 Shrink needle (10)


Each of the reduced needle marks is reduced by one stitch, and the
101 102 103 104 mark is not a stacked needle position.Support both the
left and right sides of the needle
 101 102 is the left needle, 102 is overlapped to the right, and
101 is overlapped to the left.Support multi-needle overlap

260
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 103 104 is the right needle, 104 is overlapped to the left and 103
is overlapped to the right.Support multi-needle overlap
Identification method

Expand effect

 Shrink needle (11)


Each pinch mark is 2 stitches and must be used in multiples of 2 pins.
The 101 102 103 104 mark is not a pin position.Support both the left and
right sides of the needle

Expand effect

261
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Automatic needle reduction


Automatically calculate the number of stitches in the needle interval
and perform the needle reduction in the manner of the needle (1).

 Automatic needle
Automatically calculate the number of stitches in the needle interval
and add the needles by adding the needle (1).

 Automatic needle reduction (1) (1x1)


Automatically calculate the number of needles in the needle interval
and perform the 1x1 pattern reduction in the manner of the needle (1).
For the 1x1 sample.

 Automatic needle reduction (4) (1x1)


Automatically calculate the number of stitches in the needle interval
and perform the 1x1 pattern stitching in the manner of the needle (4).
For the 1x1 sample.

262
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Automatic needle reduction (alignment)


The ribs are automatically aligned, and the needles are retracted by
means of a needle (10).
For the pit pattern.

 Add needle (1)


102 indicates a needle on the left side and 104 indicates a needle
on the right side.
When the needle is added beyond the maximum needle shaker needle number
setting, the needle is automatically segmented.
If the first behavior immediately after the addition of the needle
is single-sided weaving, the segmentation is automatically segmented to
supplement the needle effect.

263
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Needle (2)
102 indicates a needle on the left side and 104 indicates a needle
on the right side.
The number of needles added cannot exceed the maximum needle shaker
setting.
If the first behavior immediately after the addition of the needle
is single-sided weaving, the segmentation is automatically segmented to
supplement the needle effect.

264
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Please refer to the simulation chart for the specific pinning effect.

Expand effect

7.2.5 blank line (l205)


 Weaving before turning
The pre-weaving action is performed at the turning position, that is, the a-bit
motion is displayed as a high-edit.

 Knitting after turning


After setting, the knitting action is performed at the turning position.
265
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Follow (kick the yarn feeder)


Setting the yarn feeder follow-up action of the current line is done by kicking the
yarn feeder. The priority is higher than the “following mode” in the compile option,
so that the part of the pattern can be followed by the intarsia method and the part
by the yarn feeder. Follow the effect.
 Follow (introduction)
Setting the yarn feeder follow-up action of the current line is completed by the
intarsia method, and the priority is higher than the “following mode” in the compile
option, so that part of the pattern can be followed by the intarsia method, and part
of the yarn feeder method. Follow the effect.
The intarsia follow-up method is generally used for the return area of ​ ​ cotton
yarn, and the upper part is brought into the take-out area.

 Follow (after 1x1)


Follow the back of the bed 1x1 out of the way.Generally used in the jacquard
back area.

266
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Press the yarn feeder


The turning action is performed immediately after the yarn feeder is woven,
instead of usually turning the needle together after the entire line of jacquard
weaving is completed, which is generally used for the upper pattern.

 Continue the jacquard back


Applicable to the case of sesame point jacquard backing, if the backstage is
wrong after the wrong line, you can use this mark in the back line error line to
perfect the jacquard back.

 Turning the needle line (188.189)


The color code of the press pin is plotted on the line after the color code of the
flip stitch, and the effect of the pin press is performed.

267
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Braided crimping line (188.189)


The needle color code and the knitting are processed by the needle.

 Auxiliary mark line


Setting the current line is an artificially inserted action, so that the system can
ignore these inserted lines when calculating the jacquard bottom.Generally used in
the following scenarios:
 Manual action to bring in and out
 Clipping action line
 Non-assisted line marker
The area is not auxiliary line tag, forcing the current area bit to be non-assisted.

7.2.6 degree (l207)


Operation steps: The mouse clicks on the degree option in the indication window,
and the function line drawing area automatically switches to the degree control
item.The mouse is placed in the drawing area of ​ ​ the function line, and a cross
cursor appears, and the degree of displacement is adjacent to the right
side.Corresponding to the corresponding line in the main drawing area, the right
mouse button pops up the setting options.

268
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The front bed weaving time: set the degree of the front bed weaving action in
the current line;
 The condition of the back bed weaving: set the degree of the back bed weaving
action in the current line;
 Local jacquard time: set the knitting time of the local jacquard part in the current
line;
 Jacquard hoisting time: set the lycra gaze of the jacquard part in the current line;
 Turning the needle: set the working degree when the front and rear bed are
turned in the current line;
 Correction of the degree: make further corrections on the current target
segment according to the organization;

7.2.7 Shaker (l208)

269
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Set the shaker position of the current line.


 The number of needles in the shaker is greater than 7 stitches and can only be
set via the function line.
 The general setting is more common for needle * position shakers.

7.2.8 speed (l209)

270
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Set the head speed range


 Designing the head turning speed section

7.2.9 Rolling (l210)

 Set the number of main roller rolls


 Set the number of main roller roll segments

7.2.10 Weaving form (l216)


3-color jacquard operation steps (example: deer)

271
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Specify the yarn feeder group system after selecting the backstage organization

272
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The 2--6 color jacquard method is basically the same as the above-mentioned
three-color jacquard, except that the coding code and the stitch configuration of the
back bed are different.

 Jacquard weave form coding description

Xx.xx eg

273
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Group 1: The number of colors representing the jacquard


Group 2: indicates the back weave method
Group 3: Representing the yarn feeder group system definition
Group 1 Description
21:2 color jacquard
31:3 color jacquard
41:4 color jacquard
51:5 color jacquard
61:6 color jacquard
71: Multicolor jacquard
121: 2 color local jacquard
131:3 color local jacquard
141: 4-color partial jacquard
151:5 color partial jacquard
161: 6-color partial jacquard
171: Multi-color partial jacquard (supports multiple pieces of partial jacquard in one
line)
172: Multicolor partial jacquard (Intarsia yarn feeder)
Group 2 Description
In the back weave form, the pop-up window has the same setting regardless of which
one of the main windows is selected.
Group 3 Description
The definition of the yarn feeder group system is mainly based on how the color
blocks (1-8) used in the jacquard organization are combined with the yarn feeders
involved in the weaving process.(See yarn feeder system settings for details)

 The jacquard hanging yarn feeder and the wide yarn feeder number can be set
simultaneously in the yarn feeder group, provided that the jacquard hanging
yarn feeder is placed before the wide yarn feeder.
 Local jacquards need to set the back of the jacquard in the jacquard organization
chart and its size range (see example pattern).
 The multi-color jacquard dynamically determines the final color jacquard
274
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

according to the number of color codes in the intarsia page.


 The multi-color jacquard should dynamically determine the yarn feeder
relationship used in the yarn feeder group according to the color code in the
intarsia page.
 It is highly recommended to use a grid instead of the bag + deer's back.
 In the custom backstage, the rules for the front bed needle are defined in the
intarsia page, and the rules for the back bed needle are defined in the jacquard
organization chart.Generally do not appear long dashed lines here, otherwise it
may not achieve the effect you want.
 Different jacquard backs can be set in the jacquard organization chart.

 0 means the knitting pattern set in the function line is used.


 The jacquard backstage form plus 100 indicates the reverse backing, that is, the
front back is woven out of the back bed back, and the back bed is woven out.

 Intarsia weaving form coding description

275
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 When using the intarsia yarn feeder, the system 1 has an odd number of yarn
feeders, and the system 2 has an even number of yarn feeders.
 The yarn feeder should be brought to the weaving area in advance when it is not
automatically processed.
 A wide yarn feeder can be set through the yarn feeder group.
 Multi-piece weaving function can design multiple pieces on one flower board:
 Only applicable to roller machines;
 The waste yarn portion can be woven using the same yarn feeder;
 The rest can be woven using different yarn feeders;
 The spacing between each piece needs to ensure a certain number of
stitches (1 inch or more);
 Just make sure that the same size yarn feeder does not collide, you can use
the same yarn feeder on different pieces (the yarn feeder needs to be
installed).
 The main yarn feeder of each piece should be manually put into place first.

 V-neck weave form coding description

276
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The v-neck single yarn feeder uses two yarn feeders to weave the v-neck, and
the v-neck yarn feeder number is set in the summer page of the intarsia, and one
line is woven at a time.
 Wide yarn feeder for v-neck single yarn feeder: Set the yarn feeder group system
and set the corresponding wide yarn feeder in the yarn feeder group.

 The wide yarn feeder of Intarsia is set in the same way.


 The v-neck double yarn feeder is woven with 4 yarn feeders and weaving two
rows at a time.Two of the yarn feeders are located in the summer page of the
intar, and two are placed in the "knob group system" and "v-neck auxiliary yarn
feeder".

277
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

It is also possible to set the two yarn feeders in the yarn feeder group as follows:

 The yarn feeder needs to be brought outside the corresponding weaving area
before weaving.
 When the number of stitches on the left and right v-neck is several hours smaller
than the safety stitch, the weaving is to be broken.

7.2.11 yarn feeder (1) (l217)


Yarn feeder direction: only for display, it will be displayed automatically after
successful compilation.
Knotted (1/2): The system automatically performs a knotting process on the specified
edge of the pattern after the line is processed.The knot is specifically made by
weaving, hanging or kicking the yarn feeder, which can be set in the compile option.
Single port lock function: The last line of the 217 function line, filled in the 1st color
lock system 1, filled in the 2nd color lock system 2 and so on.

278
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The two-system machine only supports the locking system 1 and the locking
system 2, indicating that the left and right physical systems of the locking
machine are locked.
 The three-system machine supports the locking system 1, the locking system 2,
and the locking system 3, indicating that the left, middle, and right physical
systems of the locking machine are locked.
 Designated system: Used in conjunction with the specified weaving system of
the yarn feeder when the yarn feeder start position is set.

 A system for specifying the knitting can be set in the yarn feeder position setting;
 Generally used in the v-neck, you can specify the left yarn feeder on the left
collar and the right yarn feeder on the right collar;
 Disable the system: You can only disable the system on the side, not the system
in the middle.
 Disable left system (1): disable one of the leftmost systems;
279
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Disable left system (2): disable the two systems on the far left;
 Disable right system (1): disable one of the rightmost systems;
 Disable right system (2): disable the two systems on the far right;

7.2.12 yarn feeder (2) (l218)


Set the width of the common woven yarn feeder.

 The reset yarn feeder is only effective for the intarsia yarn feeder. Generally,
when the needle is closed at the edge of the pattern, the yarn-knit yarn inlay is
corrected in the front, so that it does not affect the subsequent needle-turning
action.
 9 means that all the yarn feeders on this line are reset;

280
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

7.2.13 clamping line (l219)


Bottom line clamping function setting

name Color Remarks

Clip 1 on the left Clamping yarn command

Clamp 2nd clip on the left Clip orientation: from left to right, in
line 3rd clip on the right order
Clip clip on the right Left side: 1, 2
side 4 Right side: No. 3 and No. 4
Line 1 clip on the left

Release Line 2 clip on the left


Release command
line 3rd clip on the right
side
The right 4th clip is
laid
No. 1 yarn yarn
No. 2 yarn yarn
Yarn out No. 3 yarn yarn Yarn out command
1 No. 4 yarn yarn Specify a braided yarn feeder to the left
Yarn out No. 5 yarn yarn and right stop positions of the width of
2 No. 6 yarn yarn the braid to close the core of the yarn
Yarn out No. 7 yarn yarn guide
3 No. 8 yarn yarn

Left side scissors Trimming instruction


scissors
Right side scissors Specify the left or right scissors to trim

281
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Function effect description


line
219_1 Clamp Clamping instruction
line Color code 1, 2, 3, 4
Left side 1, 2
Right 4, 3
219_2 Releas Release command
e line Color code 1, 2, 3, 4
Left side 1, 2
Right 4, 3
219_3 Yarn Yarn out command
out 1 Enter this command so that the bottom plate does not touch
the bottom yarn when it is raised.
The yarn exit command places the yarn feeder outside the
knitting width
The yarn exit command causes the handpiece to move to the
left or right side of the flat knitting machine during the stroke,
and the yarn guide core is stowed at the end, ignoring the rest
282
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

point of the yarn feeder parking point


Yarn exit command for the current line of knitting yarn feeders
219_4 Yarn Yarn out command
Applicable 2 system weaving, can bring out the second knitting
out 2 yarn feeder at the same time
219_5 Yarn Yarn out command
Applicable to 3 system weaving, can bring out the third knitting
out 3 yarn feeder at the same time
219_6 scissor Trimming instruction
Color code 1, 2, 3, 4
s Left side scissors: 1, 2
Right side scissors: 3, 4
219_7 Attach 1: set the bottom plate action
2: Automatically bring in the yarn
action 8: Set the big body mark
11: Set the blowing action
21: Set the yarn feeder alignment (end)
22: Set the yarn feeder alignment (start)
Note: The clamping, paying, and scissors actions act at the end of the current
knitting line.
For example, the direction of the yarn feeder is displayed as 1, and when the thread
clamping command is added, the action is performed after the right line ends (right
side). Otherwise, the yarn feeder direction is displayed as 2, and the left line ends
(left side).

 Automatically brought in yarn


 Used for starting the floor pattern;
 The yarn feeder crimping line is automatically brought in at the bottom
waste yarn section.
 Set the body mark
 Change to this mark when replacing the start;
 When the number of starting lines of the yarn feeder filling is set to zero, the
filling starts from this marking line;
 Set the yarn feeder alignment (end)
 Used for roller machine patterns;

283
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Generally used at the end of the waste yarn;


 Align the yarn feeder to the position where the pattern was originally used;
 Set yarn feeder alignment (start)
 Used for roller machine patterns;
 Generally used in the initial waste yarn section;
 Bring the yarn feeder from the initial position to the starting weaving
position;
 When the clips are linked, it is not necessary to set the scissors action, and the
scissors function line is used as the yarn output 4.

284
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

7.2.14 start both sides, turn needle + weave (l223)


Functio effect description
n line
223_2 Right handpiece Specifies that the current line's flip action is
performed in the right-hand direction
223_2 Left handpiece Specifies that the current line's flip action is
performed in the left row direction
223_2 Special pin Special model use
(weaving)
223_2 Special pin Special model use
(turning pin)

7.2.15 respectively, turn the needle (l224)


Functio effect description

285
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

n line
224_1 Turn the Enable separate needles: 1*1 turn before and after
needle
separately Enable the needle (2) separately: the first line 1*1 turn the
needle, the second line all turn the needle
Enable 2x2 turn: 2*2 turn before and after
Enable needle separation: turn the needle separately by
needle separation
224_2 Automatic Before turning over, before turning forward: the bed color
needle code is turned over the bed, then the needle is turned over,
and finally the bed is turned back to the front bed.
Before turning back, before turning over: the bed color code
is turned over the front bed, then the needle is turned over,
and finally the front bed is turned back to the back bed.
 2x2 turning needle: generally used for the needle pattern, to achieve the 1x1
needle effect of the needle pattern.

 Separation of needles: Generally, when the number of needles is large, the


needles are separated by manual needle separation.

286
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Turning the needle separately (except for straight-turning): the needle-free


turning needle is completed once, and the shaker-turning needle is realized by
1x1.

 2x2 turning needle (except for straight turning): no shaker turning needle is
completed once, and there is a shaker turning needle according to 2x2.
 Enable the needle to turn separately (inside): turn the second needle from the
outside to the inside, and turn the needle separately.
 Enable the needle to turn separately (inside) 2: Turn the second needle from the
outside to the inside first, and turn the needle 2 separately.
 Enable needle separation (inside): The second needle is turned from the outside
to the inside, and the other is separated from the needle.
287
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Enable needle separation (inside) 2: The second needle is turned first from the
outside to the inside, and the other is separated from the needle.
 Except for the vertical turning of the needles (inside): the second needle is
turned first from the outside to the inside, except for the other straight needles.
 Automatic needle turning: automatic needle handling.
 Automatically turn the coil to the opposite needle bed, and then turn the
coil back according to the situation after the turning action is completed;
 According to the "pin needle shaker number" setting in the compile option,
it can be judged whether the current line has a shaker larger than the
number of stitches, and if it exists, the needle processing is performed;
 Temporary support for the bones;
 The left and right collar pins after the v-neck splitting are not supported;
 Front turn back, back turn forward: apply to the back bed needle as the
main coil
 Front turn forward, front turn back: apply to the front bed needle as the
main coil

288
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

7.2.16 Jacquard Tuck (l225)

 The eye-catching switch: Generally, it is only set for the pure hanging line. When
there are two or more hanging coils on one needle, the eye-catching switch can
be set so that the lifting eyes can be realized.
 Jacquard tucks: Generally, the two-color cylinder jacquard will be added to the
jacquard tuck (according to the fabric needs, multi-color jacquard can be added
to the jacquard tuck), that is, a row of jacquard tissue is woven and inserted into
a row of 1*1 hanging objects.

289
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Functio effect description


n line
225 Jacquard 1, before and after 1*1
2, before and after the whole eye:
3, the first 1 * 1 tuck
4, after 1*1 tuck
5, before the lifting
6, after the lifting
7, 1x1 hanging idling
8, before and after 1 * 2 hanging
9, before and after 1 * 3 hanging
10, before and after 1*4 tuck
11, before and after 1*1 full tangle
101, before and after 1*1 tuck (b)
107, 1x1 hanging idling (B)
290
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

108, before and after 1*2 lifting (b)


109, before and after 1*3 lifting (b)
110, before and after 1*4 hanging items (b)

7.2.17 right line weaving (l226)


Forced to specify the right-hand weaving yarn feeder, generally suitable for
partial jacquard and intarsia patterns.The weaving direction is not judged based on
the initial position of the yarn feeder.Specify the current yarn feeder number, and
specify multiple yarn feeders at the same time.

7.2.18 left line weaving (l227)


Forced to specify the left-hand weaving yarn feeder, generally suitable for partial
jacquard and intarsia patterns.The weaving direction is not judged based on the
initial position of the yarn feeder.Specify the current yarn feeder number, and specify
multiple yarn feeders at the same time.

7.2.19 Bring the right line out (l228)


Forced to specify the right line to bring out the yarn feeder, generally suitable for
partial jacquard and intarsia patterns.The direction of the tape is not judged based on
the end position of the yarn feeder.Specify the current yarn feeder number, and
specify multiple yarn feeders at the same time.

7.2.20 left line brings out (l229)


Forced to specify the left line to bring out the yarn feeder, generally suitable for
partial jacquard and intarsia patterns.The direction of the tape is not judged based on
the end position of the yarn feeder.Specify the current yarn feeder number, and
specify multiple yarn feeders at the same time.

7.2.21 tightly edited, loose hanging (l232)


For the two-stage weaving such as 11 12 13 244 245, the second-segment color
code specifies other station movements, which can support the two meanings of the
same color code, and is used by special models.

291
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

7.2.22 degree 2 (l233)


Yarn mouth degree group: used to set the individual yarn feeder in the jacquard
intarsia in the preparation form.
Forced ah degree: used in the double-layer machine, the difference between
automatic and excessive, such as manual over-provision, you need to set this
function line.

7.2.23 raw grams 2 (l234)


Set the needle before weaving: Automatically perform the needle pressing
before weaving.
Set the needle before turning the needle: automatically perform the needle
pressing before turning the needle.

7.2.20 Forced Consolidation (l235)


Forced Consolidation: Forces a safe rollover action.

292
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8. PROCESS SINGLE MOLDING

An important function added to facilitate the production of craft sheets.The user


can automatically generate a bmp pattern of the piece according to the process input
on the process sheet.And the software automatically gives the basic function line
settings, the necessary splitting of the process, can be directly compiled, greatly
facilitating the user's plate making.

8.1 Enter
Click the right mouse button in the drawing area, select the template - standard,
or click the function bar shortcut directly.

8.2 Craft Order


After clicking on the standard, the process order input chart will appear.

293
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.3 Process single icon and parameter description

8.3.1 Machine Type


The bottom plate and non-starting plate can be selected from the machine type
selection.Click System Select to select 1 system, 2 systems, 3 systems, 4 systems, and
so on.
 When the bottom plate is lifted, a function line for bringing in the yarn feeder
and clamping the wire is generated.
 The single-port locking function line in the yarn feeder (1) is set in the single
system.
 The waste yarn from the bottom plate is treated by the falling cloth method, and
the non-starting bottom plate is the weaving method.
 The bottom setting is automatically changed when the model is selected.

294
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.3.2 Starting stitches


The starting stitch number is the starting width of the entire piece, that is, the
number of stitches of the bottommost rib.In the case that the rib is not covered by
the needle and the needle is not added, the number of the large body needle should
be absolutely the same as the total number of needles, otherwise the drawn piece
will be wrong!
8.3.3 Starting needle offset
The number of stitches at the beginning of the molding process is generally used
when the left and right single-piece needles are over the center line.

 When the center line is outside the pattern, the outer part is shaped incorrectly,
so it is necessary to set the offset to move the center line to the inside of the

295
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

pattern.
 The specific offset can be determined by checking the left and right needles in
the inspection. When the left and right needles have a negative number, the
offset needs to be set. The adjustment value should be greater than or equal to
the number.
 Negative numbers are offset to the left and positive numbers are shifted to the
right.
8.3.4 Number of waste yarn turns
The number of waste yarn turns on the top of the piece.The system defaults to
40 and is set to 0 if no waste yarn is required.
 It is valid when the bottom plate is not used.
8.3.5 rib rotation number
The number of ribs woven by the pieces.
 To remove the idling part, the current default idling is 1.5 rpm.
8.3.6 ribbing
Set the rib type, the software presets 11 kinds of ribs: 1*1, 2*1, 2*2, 3*2, 3*3, f
rib, 1*1 vertical bar, four flat rib, single rib, face 1*1 rib, bottom 1*1 rib.And you can
set the rib pattern according to your needs.

8.3.7 rib transition line


It is used to set the rib transition line, and change the transition mode according
to whether the body is a normal weave or a different jacquard type.

296
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The seventh paragraph affecting the transition of ribs to the big body.
 Double-sided jacquard is used for all-selection, 1x1-A, 1x1-B, bags, bags + deer,
deer and other jacquard forms.
 1x1 竺, etc. are used for various corresponding celestial jacquard forms.
 1x1 day 竺 (2) is another transitional mode for the 1x1 day 竺 jacquard form.

8.3.8 Rib arrangement


The arrangement of the ribs includes a 1 pack, a 2 pack, a 3 pack, a bottom 1
pack, and a bottom 2 pack.

 There is no need to set the arrangement when f ribbing.


 Empty indicates a bevel.
8.3.9 rib plus wire
 Used to set the roving wire processing.
 The yarn feeder number must be set.
 The number of revolutions of the wire must be set.
 The yarn feeder is processed as it is brought in.

297
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.3.10 idling height


The bottom idling settings of 1.5 rpm, 1 rpm, 0 rpm, 0.5 rpm, 2.5 rpm and 2 rpm
are respectively supported.
 When the height is even, the process will automatically bring the main yarn
feeder to the right in advance.

8.3.11 collar
Collar selection: v-neck, fake collar (tuck), fake collar (shifting needle), round
neck, sleeve, fake (pick hole).

 Empty indicates sleeves.


 The v-neck and round neck are treated the same.

v collar: v-neck molding as shown

298
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Round neck: same v collar

Fake (tuck): fake (tuck) molding as shown

Fake (shift needle): fake (shift needle) molding as shown

299
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Sleeve: sleeve molding as shown

300
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

False (pick hole):

False (four flat): Generally used in the fake collar of Siping organization.

False (reverse needle): Generally applied to a single-sided fake collar.

301
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.3.12 single film


It is possible to generate left and right single pieces of v-neck and round neck.
The following figures are the left and right slices, respectively.

 Empty means the whole piece.


 The remaining part of the collar is treated as a flat.
8.3.13 needle
The number of stitches required to be left in the middle of the piece is only used
for the collection.
As shown in the figure, open the collar and leave 2 needles

302
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Calculation: After the needle is left in the input, the left-handed needle and the
right-handed needle can be automatically calculated, and the calculation result is
compared with the process sheet to confirm whether it is correct.

8.3.14 left-handed needle, right-handed needle


 As shown in the above figure, the left needle is a white circle selection.
 The opening of the needle is the middle needle.
 The number of stitches left on the left shoulder after opening the needle on the
craft sheet and the number of stitches left on the right shoulder after the needle
is opened.If the sleeves are made, the number of stitches left on the piece
should be set to: left-handed needle + right-handed needle = the number of
needles left.(Note: The left-handed needle and the right-handed needle can be
different, but all need to be set! The setting method can be automatically given
by the process list check option.

Process check

303
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The “Neutral needle mismatch” appears. Please check whether the needle is left,
the left needle is left, the right needle is left, and the process of the collar is
correct.If there is no problem, first enter the left and left needles of the
inspection page, and then check the pattern to see if the pattern is correct.
 In some places, the number of needles in the process slip when using the fake
(shifting needle) and the number of needles required to be input in the system
are two stitches. Please note.

8.3.15 collar offset


The collar is centered by default, and if there is an asymmetry, you can enter it
here.The offset to the right is positive, the left is negative, and the unit is (number of
stitches).

 Negative numbers are offset to the left and positive numbers are shifted to the
right.
8.3.16 large body symmetry, collar symmetry

304
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The system defaults to large body symmetry and collar symmetry. If there is an
asymmetry, the check box can be removed. In the process sheet input, the right body
and right collar input options will be added.
 When you are asymmetrical, you must enter the process order on the right.

8.3.17 Retaining the pattern


The process sheet can be formed on the basis of the retained pattern: for
305
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

example, a pattern image is first made in the drawing area.

Take the x-axis and y-axis coordinates of the center point of the pattern, and the
center point of the pattern is the coordinates of the open collar midpoint.Cover the
retained pattern with the collar coordinates as the origin.As shown below

 Enter the center point coordinates of the drawn pattern into the “pattern center
point” of the craft sheet.
306
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The center point of the sleeve and the fake collar defaults to the center of the
bottom of the body.
 The center point of the v-neck and round neck defaults to the center of the
bottom of the collar and can be modified in the advanced parameters.
 Keep the intarsia operation and retain the pattern.Valid for other views than the
pattern.
 Only the function line settings with values ​ ​ are retained when the function
line is reserved.
 The retention eyemap is reserved for the degree map.
 Retaining the ic/ij color code is valid for the ic/ij color code in the reserved
pattern.
8.3.18 left and right, left and right, left and right
The pattern is left in the case of retaining the pattern, which is convenient for
drawing the jacquard.as follows

The effect of leaving 4 stitches on the top, bottom, left and right is as follows

307
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

308
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 For the remaining part of the reserved pattern, further processing is required.

8.3.19 before falling, after the start and idling


According to the process requirements, you can choose the way to remove the
waste yarn and the way to start and idling.The default is the back-and-down control
before the fall.The following example

8.3.20 v-neck split, v-neck pull tower summer, standard collar, v-neck
shovel
After the v-neck process is formed, you can choose the v-neck automatic split or
309
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

the intarsia practice.After the v-neck is dismantled, the yarn feeder direction
discrimination single system dual system can be used.The following figure shows the
view of the v-neck without the split and the v-neck split and the v-neck guide.
 If the v-neck part is neither dismantled, not intarsia, nor a standard collar, then
the v-neck yarn feeder is set.
 If the above four settings are not, then you need to manually handle the v-neck
yarn feeder.
 For the v-necked Tasha, the standard collar, the corresponding compile options
are set automatically.

v collar does not split, nor is it

V-neck

310
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

v collar

 The default setting compile option is "v-neck automatic intarsia".

Standard collar

311
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The default setting compile option is "Automatic Standard Collar".


 It is required that the "pinning method" in the advanced parameter is
"ignore".
 v collar yarn feeders are arranged around.

V-neck shovel: The shovel is used to take the needle in the single v-neck part of the process.

 Generally used for the pattern of the back piece collar.

8.3.21 v-neck line number


 When the v-neck is split, you can specify the number of rows to be split.
The default is 2 rows.

312
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.3.22 Round bottom bottom


The treatment of the bottom of the round neck when the needle is larger
than three needles.

8.3.23 Jacquard pin


Jacquard pin color code is used when collecting the needle: 191-198.
8.3.24 pumping needle
A needle in the center of the body is not woven.

313
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The starting number of the big body must be an odd number.


 Only valid for fake collars and sleeves.
8.3.25 display center
Shows the center point of the big body.

 This color code is for reference only and must be modified to a suitable color
code in the official pattern.
8.3.26 cotton yarn center mark
The center point of the cotton yarn showing the sleeve.

 The number of markers is 1, which identifies the number of stitches at the


center point.
 When the number of stitches is multiple, the number of stitches is
separated by "v", and the position of the mark is counted from the left.
 Number of token lines: indicates the position of the marker in the cotton
yarn, and the number of specified rows from the bottom up.
 The height of the token defaults to 2 lines.
 The mark color code defaults to the color code of the eye.

314
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.3.27 size
The size mark of the pattern is displayed.You can choose the size of the eye or
the hole to mark the size.

 When the size is other, you can customize the number of sizes.
 The number of spacers for the size mark can be set.

8.3.28 Inspection
315
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

After the process single input is completed, you can click the “Check” button to
check the relevant parameters of the current process order for comparison with the
original process data.

 If it is an asymmetrical pattern, then the total number of lines, the number


of clips, the number of clips, and the number of collars respectively show
the data on the left and right sides.

8.3.29 contour map


Click on the "Contour" button to output the basic outline of the worksheet in the
pattern.Generally used for irregular process orders.

8.3.30 printing
Print process sheet data.

316
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.3.31 Scheme List


Display the process order parameter file and process order file in the scheme
directory, and double-click the file to load it automatically.
8.3.32 template list
Displays a template file or system template that is compatible with the process.

You can check the template you want to import.


 Template: Import templates from system template management

317
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

You can import multiple templates at once by holding down the "Ctrl"
key while double-clicking.
 File: Import template files from local files
 Paste: Paste the template file copied in the Explorer into the list
 Delete: delete the selected template
 Clear: Clear all templates

8.3.33 Enabling Import Templates


Specifies that the template in the list is output to the process sheet
at the time of the process sheet output for the process order call.

318
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

319
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.4 input

8.4.1 Large body craft list

 Turn: The number of revolutions of the process.


 Needle: The number of needles for adding and receiving needles. The
default needle is negative, and the needle is positive.
 Times: The number of cycles of the process.
 Side: The number of left edges of the needle.
 Stealing: The number of stolen needles after the needle is left.
 Valid: When the number of stitches is less than or equal to the effective
value, the stitch color code is used in the pattern, otherwise the knitting
color code is used.A valid zero means that the default number of valid
stitches is used.
 Other: Set the relevant identifier of the process.
 Weaving: The organization of the craft line.
 Degree: Set the number of density segments of the process line

320
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Speed: set the number of speed segments of the process line


 Roll: Set the number of roller segments for this process line.

 Mark: Mark the mark on the edge of the pattern.The number of stitches
indicates the number of stitches at the edge of the pattern.The number of
negative stitches indicates the number of stitches in the mark position, and
the number of stitches of the pick hole, pull wire, pull wire (2), pick hole (2),
and pick hole (3) has the same meaning.

 Pick the hole: mark the edge of the pattern.The number of stitches

321
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

indicates the number of stitches at the edge of the pattern.

 Cotton yarn: It means that the width of the cotton yarn enters the first
stage of the process. At this time, a yarn feeder is used for weaving, and
the needle is treated with a shovel needle.

 Clip: The needle is handled by the spigot, and only one clip can be used in
one process.
 Pull the line: mark the edge of the pattern.The number of stitches indicates
the number of stitches at the edge of the pattern.

 Clip edge (2): Handle the spigot action in small image mode, the system
will automatically generate the corresponding clip edge (2) small image.

322
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Shrinking needle: The needle is handled by automatic shrink needle.


 Adding a needle: The needle is treated by automatic needle addition.
 Qi Jia: The process data is just a mark, indicating that the process starts to
be processed here, and the real needle addition process needs to be input
later.

 Accomplished: The process data is just a mark, indicating that the process
begins to be processed, and the actual pinning process needs to be
entered before.

323
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Stepping the needle, closing the needle, and collecting the needle (2): You
can specify the needle handling method for each needle.
 Picking holes and middle marks: Handling the pick holes and marks at the
center of the pattern line.The number of stitches indicates the interval of
the center mark.A number of stitches of 0 indicates that a marker is
generated.

 Needle cutting: The needle closing part at the beginning of the pattern is
completed by cutting.The edge motion is not counted in the pinning range.

324
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 End cropping: Specify the end line of the crop, which is used in
combination with the cropping and cropping, and the middle of the two
areas is the cropping part.

325
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Thick needle pull: Generates a pull action outside the regular pattern,
suitable for thick needle models.

 Pull wire (2), pick hole (2), pick hole (3): The corresponding mark is
processed in the form of 2 turns and 3 turns.

326
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Weaving: Indicates whether the process is pre-weaving, post-weaving or


ribbing.

 Front: Front weaving.


 After: After weaving.
 Rib: Consistent ribbing in the process.
 F rib, 1x1 rib, 2x1 rib, 2x2 rib, 3x2 rib, 3x3 rib, 1x1 rib vertical, four flat rib,
single rib, face 1x1 rib, bottom 1x1 rib: consistent with regular rib.
 Single fish scale, double fish scale, face three flat, bottom three flat, four
flat wicker, four flat beads, single osmanthus needle, double osmanthus
needle, double reverse: can define the body to output different tissues.
 Four empty: one turn empty line and four flat.
 Degree: Indicates the degree of weaving and the time of turning the
needle used in the process. 0 means default.
 Speed: Indicates the speed of knitting and the speed of turning when the
process is used. 0 means default.
 Roll: Indicates the woven fabric roll and the roll when the needle is used in
this process. 0 means default.
 The input box can be moved by the up, down, left and right arrows.

327
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 You can enter the process value via the input keyboard with a double click
of the mouse.
 Other and weaving options can be set via the right mouse button menu.
 0 turns to receive.
 In this process, it is shaken first and then collected.
 Shortcut: Press the f1 key to view the shortcut definition.
 Ctrl+a: add a needle
 Ctrl+b: post weave
 Ctrl+c: copy
 Ctrl+d: delete
 Ctrl+e: clear
 Ctrl+f: front weave
 Ctrl+g: ribbing
 Ctrl+h: pick hole
 Ctrl+i: clip edge (2)
 Ctrl+j: clip edge
 Ctrl+l: pull wire
 Ctrl+m: mark
 Ctrl+n: none (other)
 Ctrl+o: paste (rewrite mode)
 Ctrl+p: append
 Ctrl+r: shrink needle
 Ctrl+s: select all
 Ctrl+t: insert
 Ctrl+v: paste (insert mode)
 Ctrl+w: exchange
 Ctrl+x: cut
 Ctrl+y: cotton yarn
 Ctrl+z: Paste (append method)
 Ctrl+1: f rib
328
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 CTRL+2: 1x1 rib


 CTRL+3: 2x1 rib
 CTRL+4: 2x2 rib
 CTRL+5: 3x2 rib
 CTRL+6: 3x3 rib
 CTRL+7: 1x1 ribbed vertical bar
 Ctrl+8: four flat rib
 Ctrl+9: single rib
 CTRL+0: face 1x1 rib
 CTRL+Q: bottom 1x1 rib

8.4.2 collar craft list

 You must enter it when you are in the collar.


 Turn: The number of revolutions of the process.
 Needle: The number of needles for adding and receiving needles. The
default needle is positive and the needle is negative.
 Times: The number of cycles of the process.
 Side: The number of left edges of the needle.
 Stealing: The number of stolen needles after the needle is left.
 Valid: When the number of stitches is less than or equal to the effective
value, the stitch color code is used in the pattern, otherwise the knitting

329
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

color code is used.A valid zero means that the default number of valid
stitches is used.
 Others: support mark, pick hole, pull wire, clip edge (2), step pin, needle
pin, step pin (2).

8.4.3 Cycle Process Sheet

 It can be set by the right mouse button menu.

8.4.4 Right click menu


Clicking the right mouse button in the process order input field will bring up
some options.As shown below

 Copy: Copy this line of data, you can select multiple lines to copy at a time.
330
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Cut: Cut the data of this line.


 Paste: Paste the copied data.
 Insert mode: Insert the copied process line in batches before the current line.
 Rewrite mode: batch modify the copied process line from the current line.
 Append method: Add the copy process line in batches as the last.
 Mirror copy: In the case of left and right asymmetry, copy the process on the
other side.
 Interchange: In the case of left and right asymmetry, the process of the left and
right sides is interchanged.
 Cycle: Set the cycle of the selected process.
 Insert: Insert a line before the line.
 Delete: Delete the line.
 Append: Insert 4 lines at the end.
 Clear: Clear the contents of the entire process order and confirm it before
clearing.

8.4.5 Other identifiers


 No: There is no other action on this line.
 Mark: Mark on this line. The number of stitches entered in the mark line
indicates the number of offset stitches where the mark is located. The default is
2 stitches, as follows

331
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 You can enter the number of stitches to indicate the number of offset stitches
where the mark is located.
 A positive number of stitches indicates the number of offset stitches from the
current weaving position.
 A negative number of stitches indicates the number of offset stitches starting
from the previous mark position.The number of negative needles for picking
holes and pulling wires has the same meaning.

 Pick hole: Do the pick hole mark on the line. The number of stitches input
in the pick hole line indicates the number of offset stitches where the pick
hole is located. The default is 2 stitches.
 The number of stitches that can be entered indicates the number of offset
332
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

stitches where the pick holes are located.


 Cotton yarn: indicates that the cotton yarn is sealed above this section.
 The default is for the left and right shoulders to be the closed cotton yarn.
 If the cotton yarn is present multiple times, the width of the first time is taken as
the width of the cotton yarn.
 The yarn feeder under the cotton yarn is kicked in and needs further processing.
 The height of the cotton yarn defaults to 10 lines.
 In the cotton yarn range, the lifting eye is added for the returning process, and
the first line of the oblique shoulder needs to set the cotton yarn marking.

 Clip edge: the edge mark is the flat mark, automatically do the flat and split,
the flat method is set in the advanced trocar mode.
 When the number of stitches on the side of the clip is less than or equal to valid,
the stitch color code is used for flattening.
 When the v-neck is left and right, the remaining part is also processed in a flat
manner.
 Immediately after the clamping, it needs to be processed manually.
 The flattening process can be combined with the previous line.
 There can only be one clip ID in each craft order.

333
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Pull wire: Make a pull mark on the line and the next line. The position of
the default pull line is offset by 2 pins.

 Clip edge (2): The trimming action is completed in the form of a small
image on the current line, and the stitching processing method is
consistent with the clip edge.
 There can be multiple clips (2) in each process sheet.
 Clip (2) The small color code is set in the advanced parameters.
 The pinning method generally requires left and right misalignment.
334
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The flattening thumbnail is generated based on the current trocar pattern.

 Shrink pin: Generates an automatic pinch line.

 Add a needle: Generate an automatic needle line.

 Qijia: Generate waste yarn and add the needle to the needle.
 The Qijia process is a mark and does not participate in the calculation of the
needle. It is necessary to reflect the process data of the number of needles in
the subsequent process.
 Collected: Generate waste yarn and receive the needle.
 The collection process is a mark and does not participate in the calculation of the
needle. It is necessary to reflect the process data of the number of needles in

335
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

the previous process.


 Stepping needle, sleeve closing needle, stepping needle (2): It is consistent
with the needle receiving method in the advanced parameters. When the
needle is set, the setting is used to handle the needle. If not, the advanced
parameter is used. The way to receive the needle is handled.
 Pick hole: Create the pick color code according to the left and right
symmetry. The number of stitches input indicates the number of stitches in
the middle of the pick holes on the left and right sides, and 0 indicates that
a pick color code is generated at the center.

 The middle mark: generates the mark color code in a bilaterally


symmetrical manner. The number of stitches input indicates the number of
stitches in the middle of the left and right marks, and 0 indicates that a
mark color code is generated at the center.

8.4.6 Front weave, back weave, ribbing


That is, the weaving mode of the big body, the front weaving is all No. 1 color,
the rear weaving is all No. 2 color, and the rib is the current bottom rib pattern.It is
also possible to specify a specific rib form.
 The pin color code is also different.
 The ribbing needle needs to be handled by itself.
8.4.7 Mirror Copy
When the process order is asymmetrical, you can use the change function to

336
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

copy another piece of process data.


The specific performance is:
 In the left body, the data of the right body is copied to the left side;
 In the right body, copy the data of the left body to the right body;
 In the left collar, the data of the right collar is copied to the left collar;
 In the right collar, copy the data of the left collar to the right collar;
 The mirror copy function is only supported when the process order is
asymmetric.
8.4.8 cycle
You can set the loop function for certain process single line counts.

First select the multi-line process sheet data, and then execute the loop function
to set the loop. The following figure sets the line 1-4 and loops 3 times.

After the loop is set, you can see the loop data in the “Cycle” page. The figure
below shows that the left body 1-4 lines are cycled 3 times, and the forming effect is
as shown on the right.

337
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

338
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.5 advanced parameters

8.5.1 front weaving


Select the color code for the stitching before weaving.

 The pin color code can also be a small color code.


 The switching color code supports conversion between 61-64 and 101-104.
 Lock the pin color code: The pin color code does not change with the
actual pattern.

8.5.2 post weaving


Select the color code for the stitching after weaving.

339
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Switching color codes supports conversion between 91-94 and 105-108.


8.5.3 yarn feeder & number of segments
The number of segments in the process of forming the single yarn and the
default yarn feeder number of the main yarn and waste yarn.The default picture in
this plate making system is as shown below, and the user can modify it according to
the usage habits.

 The number of segments of the function line medium, speed, roll, sub-roll,
and sub-roll switch is generated.
 Jacquard Tuck: The default number of segments used for Leica Jacquard
tucks;
 Bring in and out: the default number of segments that are automatically
brought into and out of the yarn feeder when used for intarsia;
 Knot: the number of braids used to tie the yarn feeder;
 Local jacquard: the default number of segments used for local jacquard;
 Single-sided jacquard: The number of braids at the joint when the jacquard
is connected on one side.
 Auto Follow: The number of kicker segments used when the yarn feeder is

340
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

automatically followed.
 Shrinking needle: used to reduce the number of needles when the needle
is needled.
 Bottom Elastic: The number of braids used for the rubber yarn feeder.
 Sealing bottom: The number of weaving segments used to seal the bottom.
 The mouth is relaxed: the number of the last line of the cotton yarn is
large.
 Tab: The number of segments used in the tab.
 Four empty: the number of four flats in the four-air organization.
 Kicking the sand mouth: the number of automatic kicking sands.
 Start looking at the eye: after the setting, the number of segments in the
first line of the rib body is generated.
 Automatically bring in the yarn: set the bottom pattern to automatically
bring in the yarn.Not explicitly introduced in the pattern.
 Enable the turning needle segment: Turn the needle to set the number of
turning needle segments, otherwise use the number of knitting segments.
 Custom Segment Value: Allows you to manually enter the number of
segments in the process order entry interface.
 The yarn feeder 2 is used in a dual system or a v-neck.
 The v-neck waste yarn feeder refers to the yarn feeder number used in the
cotton portion of the v-neck.
 The ribbed yarn feeder 2 means that two yarn feeders are used when
knitting the rib, and 0 means that the second rib yarn feeder is not used.A
tick indicates that the ribbed portion is completely woven using the ribbed
yarn feeder 2.
 The yarn splitter is used to use a specific yarn in the seam removal section
for better stitching.
 The yarn feeder is used for the second yarn feeder when the rib is applied.
 The rubber yarn feeder is used to weave a rubber band before the rib.
 The cotton yarn feeder is used to end the part of the yarn end of the
341
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

cotton yarn.
 By default, the yarn feeder 1 is on the left and the yarn feeder 2 is on the
right. You can set all the main yarn feeders 2 and the waste yarn feeder 2
to the left by setting "2# yarn feeder on the left".
 For the dual system, the default yarn feeder is alternately woven with 1, 2,
and can be set by simply using the yarn feeder 1 by setting "use a yarn
feeder".
 The yarn feeders are used interchangeably. When the two systems are
woven with two yarn feeders, the knitting order of the yarn feeders is set
by the cross mode (1212) or the cycle mode (1221).Generally not used.
 The v-neck uses a yarn feeder, and the main yarn feeder 1 first weaves the
left collar and then weaves the right collar, which is generally used for the
knitting of the back panel.

 1*1: When the V-neck is woven with a yarn feeder, the V-neck pinning area
performs 1x1 weaving.

342
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Separate collar: The left and right collars are weaved separately, weaving
the left collar first, then weaving the right collar.

 The knotted yarn is spun out, and the main yarn feeder is yarned during
the weaving process of the cotton yarn.

343
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 When the yarn exit of the waste yarn is set, the yarn exit function line is set
for the waste yarn feeder before entering the rib.
 When the rubber yarn yarn is set, the rubber yarn yarn is woven and the
yarn is immediately discharged.
 When the yarn feeder yarn is set, the rib yarn yarn feeder is woven and the
yarn is immediately discharged.
 Other yarn feeders: In the bottom pattern, the yarn feeders that are not
used in the craft sheet are automatically brought in.
 The bottom version automatically weaves the No. 8 yarn feeder: the No. 8
yarn feeder is no longer used in the bird's eye.

8.5.4 Other
 Effective stitch number: Used for the effective default value in the process
sheet, which is larger than the effective needle and does not receive the
needle.
 Minimum number of needles for hanging needles: When the number of
flat needles is larger than the minimum number of needles, one needle is
handled on the side. When the minimum number of stitches is less than or
equal to the minimum number of needles, the needles and the falling cloth
are not processed.
 The trocar method: used for the process of flat processing with the edge
identification.The figure below shows the various treatments for flat 5
344
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

needles.

Single needle 1

Single needle 2

345
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Single needle 3

Double needle 1

Double needle 2

Separation needle

346
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Main yarn falling

Double needle 3

Single needle (jacquard)

347
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Double needle 4

Double needle (four flat)

348
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

automatic

 Round neck bottom method: used for the treatment of the needle in the bottom
of the round neck.The figure below shows the various treatments for the 12-pin.
Weaving

Main yarn falling


349
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Waste yarn

 Weaving is carried out using "waste yarn feeder 1".


 The number of segments is the number of "round collar" segments.
 The waste yarn feeder is brought in by the weaving gaze, taking care not to
conflict with the round neck pin.
Single needle 1

350
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Single needle 2

Single needle 3

Double needle 1

351
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Double needle 2

Separation needle

Double needle 3
352
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Single needle (jacquard)

Double needle 4

Double needle (four flat)

353
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

automatic

 Number of main yarns falling: The number of knitting lines of the main yarn
when the "main yarn is dropped" is selected by the trocar method or the round
neck method.
 Number of cotton yarn rows: the number of waste yarns at the top of the piece
(ie, the closed waste yarn).The system defaults to 10 and is set to 0 if not
required.
 Stealing color code: The color code used when stealing food, the default is 16
color, you can also use 0 color.It can be changed according to user's habits.It is
recommended to use the 16th color, so that it can be handled correctly when
the intarsia is retained.
 Center color code: The color code of the center of the bottom of the body.

354
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 If the width of the body is odd, one column is displayed, and if it is even, two
columns are displayed.
 Weaving mode: Select front weave, back weave, rib.
 It is used for the initial knitting option when adding a line to the big craft order
and adding the line input.
 Immediately after changing the weaving mode, it will take effect in the craft
order.
 The rib option indicates the use of ribbing in the process sheet, but if the process
sheet is f ribbed, the ribbing option is invalid, or the front weave is processed.

 In the rib pattern, the needle collection, flattening, etc. must be further
processed.
 A variety of rib patterns are not currently supported.
 Waste yarn mode: direct weaving, needle knitting.The needle knitting mode can
be used in consideration of the needle addition problem of the single system
seal at the time of sealing.
 This feature is only available when the backplane is not in use.
 The logo with the v logo can be used for opening the flower pattern.
Direct weaving (v)

355
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

.
Needle knitting 1v

Needle knitting 2

356
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Needle knitting 3

Direct weaving 2

Direct weaving 3

Direct weaving 4
357
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Direct weaving 5v

Direct weaving 6v

Direct weaving 7
358
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Direct weaving 8v

Direct weaving 9v

 Yarn feeder arrangement: When the 2 system roller machine starts the bird's eye
waste yarn and ends the waste yarn weaving, set the order of the yarn feeder
knitting.
 Double rib color code: The front woven woven fabric can be selected in two
ways.The color is No. 1 and No. 8 respectively.You can change it yourself
according to your habits.Basically only distinguish the beginning waste yarn part.
359
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 False (trace) color code: set the color code when the fake (tuck), the hanging eye
is the same tuck, and the weaving is the reverse weaving.
 False (tuck) height: Set the handle for the fake (tuck), and support one dart for
each line.
 0 means that only the eye is added at the needle.
 False (tether) mode: When setting the fake (tuck), the color code within the
collar range.
 Connection: The color inside the collar is connected, such as 1, 2, 3.
 No connection: The inside of the collar is a non-connected color code, such as 8,
9, 10.

360
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Pinning method: Set the height of the needle.


 Ignore: The left and right needles are on the same line.
 Left: The left pin is one line lower.
 Right side: The right side of the needle is lower than the line.
 Left 2: The left hand is lower by two lines.
 Right 2: The right side of the needle is lowered by two lines.
 Pull line color code: set the pull line action to use weaving or hanging action.
 The way of collecting the collar (3): ordinary, ladder, and mouth.The default is
normal.
 When the needle is closed, the 3-pin needle color code is divided into 2 lines,
and the first stitch is received, and then the second stitch is received.
 Only for the collar part.
 The ladder mode and the socket method are only used for clearing.

361
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Large body pinning method (3): ordinary, ladder, and mouth.The default is
normal.
 When the needle is closed, the 3-pin needle color code is divided into 2 lines,
and the first stitch is received, and then the second stitch is received.
 Used only for the big part.
 The ladder mode and the socket method are only used for clearing.

 The way of collecting the collar (2): ordinary, ladder, and mouth.The default is
normal.
 When the needle is closed, the 2-pin needle color code is divided into 2 lines,
and the first stitch is received first, and then the other stitch is received.
 Only for the collar part.
 Usually used in jacquard.

362
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Large body pinning method (2): ordinary, ladder, and mouth.The default is
normal.
 When the needle is closed, the 2-pin needle color code is divided into 2 lines,
and the first stitch is received first, and then the other stitch is received.
 Used only for the big part.
 Usually used in jacquard.
 Cotton yarn uses a yarn feeder: the cotton yarn is partially woven with a yarn
feeder.
Ordinary woven 9v waste yarn

Other waste yarn mode

363
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Use a yarn feeder on the big body: the large part is woven with a yarn feeder.Can
be used in dual systems.The body only produces a yarn feeder.
 Needle number method: There are two ways to add a needle. The needle
reduction is positive and the needle addition is positive.In the process of
single-input, you can modify it according to the user's habits. The modified
molding process will be replaced automatically.
 Used only for the big part.
 The collar part is incremented by default.
 Number of revolutions: Enter the number of revolutions and the number of
input lines.The input method can be selected during the process single input,
and can be changed according to the user's needs. After the change, the original
process list will be automatically replaced.
 You can enter 0.5 rpm.
 You cannot enter a decimal number for the number of rows.
 Rib mode: full rib, non-complete rib.The complete rib, ie the form of a diagonal
package, must be an integer multiple of the minimum unit rib.Non-complete ribs
can be in the form of bread, bottom bag, and the like.
 Density unit: turn / inch, turn / 10 cm.Represents the number of revolutions per
unit inch and the number of revolutions of 10 unit centimeters.

364
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Used for vertical and horizontal input units in the process sheet.
 See the true ready-to-size effect in the preview of the craft sheet.
 Adding a needle: according to the direction of the yarn feeder, stealing once,
stealing every turn.This feature is only available when selecting a single
system.According to the direction of the yarn feeder, it is the first to accept the
first, and the direction of the yarn feeder is automatically considered.

Yarn feeder direction

Steal 1 time

Steal 1 time 2

365
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Stealing twice

Stealing many times

Yarn mouth direction + stealing


366
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Stealing two needles

Yarn mouth direction + stealing 2

 Waste yarn bottoming method: Different stitching methods are adopted in the
367
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

second and third paragraphs.

368
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Retention center point: The point corresponding to the coordinates of the


369
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

pattern center point when used to retain the pattern function.


 Bottom of the body: Corresponds to the starting point of the bottom of the body
above the rib.
 The bottom of the collar: corresponds to the starting center point of the
remaining part of the collar.
 Clip: Corresponds to the center point where the clip height is located.
 Line height: Set the line function line value at the specified height.
 Clip height (fine needle machine / thick needle machine): Set the 1# clip clamp
line function line value at the specified height, 7 needles and below for the thick
needle machine, and more than 7 pins for the fine needle machine.
 Bottom saving: The number of circulating lines of the starting waste yarn when
starting the floor pattern.
 Automatic stealing: Automatically generate stealing data during the process of
single input.
The number of needles to be stolen is reduced by one.
Clipping lines do not produce stealing.
After the cotton yarn logo is no longer eaten.
Support to set the number of automatic stealing needles, 0 is the number of
needles minus one.
 Turn the needle separately: automatically generate the separate needle function
line.
You can set the way to turn the needle function separately.
 Auto Leica: Set whether to generate a jacquard tuck in the 225-1 function
line.This setting only works when the function line is reserved.
 The two system clips are flatly inserted into one line: when this option is not set,
when the two systems are flattened, one yarn feeder is received on each of the
left and right sides, so that there is no row of knitting lines between the two
flats.After setting this option, the two sides are closed and processed with a yarn
feeder.
 Not applicable to single systems.
370
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Dismantling: Add two lines in the third paragraph to make the stitching effect
better in some cases.
 It is only used in the case of the stitching of the four flat knitting.

371
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 V-neck bottom twist: Add 1x1 of the strand at the beginning of the V-neck.
 Only used when the middle is 0 stitches.

 Rib Enable Savings: The ribbing enables the saving function line when the
bottom plate is not raised.
 Side note: When the process single body process data format is x-0-n, the mark
is displayed with a non-connected color code each time.Use color or other logos.

 Waste yarn falling cloth: When no bottom plate is used, no waste yarn segment
is generated, but the cloth is directly treated.

372
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Falling cloth clip: When the automatic yarn exit from the bottom plate, the clip
position is executed in the falling area.
 Sealing bottom: The body is sealed before the bottom, and it is only effective for
single-sided ribbing.
 Prohibit connection: Automatically generate a connection-free function line.
 Automatically set ic/ij mark: When the pattern is reserved, if there is ic/ij color
code, the ic/ij mark is automatically filled in.
 Enable local jacquard target segment: Set the local kraft degree segment or the
local jacquard gravitation segment when generating the local jacquard in the
function line.
 Enable the turning of the needle segment: set the generation function line to
turn the needle segment to generate 23 segments.
 Clip edge (2) mode: the same as the spigot method of the flat edge of the clip, so
that the clip edge (2) and the clip edge adopt different treatment methods.
It is realized in small image mode, and the small color code is defined in the front
knitting and the rear knitting.
Need to choose the left or right "spinning mode", so that the small image
expansion direction is normal.
 Flat-receiving hang-up needle: For the flat position of the clip edge, it supports
the hanging needle drop processing during flat collection to achieve better
flattening effect.All stylus methods except the main yarn drop are effective.At
the same time, in the partial trocar mode, the original method of hanging a
needle and falling cloth is invalid.
373
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Yarn feeder alignment: Automatically align the yarn feeders at the bottom of the
bird's eye and at the end of the waste yarn.Effective for roller machines.
 Bottom alignment: The other woven yarn feeders are brought to the appropriate
weaving position after the starting waste yarn is woven, and are generally used
for sleeve-like patterns.

 End alignment: Bring the yarn feeder to the next suitable weaving position at the
end of the waste yarn section.

374
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Enable ribbed gram: Automatically set the gram value different from the big
body in the rib section.

 Number of revolutions: Set the height of the generated collection process.

 Qijia revolutions: Set the height of the generated Qijia processing.

375
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Qijia method: Automatically generate Qijia processing in the Qijia process item.

 Qi Jia: Enter the mark in the big body process.Ziga itself is just a mark and does
not participate in process calculations.The Qijia process can be input in multiple
stages.

 Turning the needle: handling the Qijia in a way that turns the needle to one side;

 Falling cloth: Handling Qijia in a way that is laid out in one side;

 Thick needle: A kind of uniform treatment for thick needles.


376
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Falling cloth (2): treating Qijia in a way that is laid out in one side;

 After the addition of Qijia: the processing method of the needle adding process
after the end of Qijia.

 Stealing: It is only suitable for the process of adding one needle.

377
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Scissor delay line number: In the case of non-cutting clip linkage, the number of
rows in which the scissors are delayed compared to the gripping action.
 Shovel method: handling at the shovel position.
 Ignore: Do not handle the shovel.
 Tucking: Shovel the needle in the way of hanging. If it is a simple single
system, shovel the needle by knitting + turning.

 Weaving: Shovel the needle in a weaving manner.

 Front and rear hoisting: Before and after the shovel method, if it is a simple
single system, the shovel is used in the previous weaving method.

378
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Custom: small picture mode, hanging kicking yarn shovel needle

 Tie 2: Through the tight eye method

 Front and rear eye 2: tightly hanging method

379
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Front weaving and rear hanging: generally applicable to four flat structures,
after weaving plus front hanging

 Saving mark: Set whether to automatically generate a mark line with a saving of
1 in the waste yarn and the mixed section.
 Closed color code: Set the color code of the needle cutting position.

380
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Needle cutting height: Set the separation distance of the needle cutting needle
position.
 Right body shovel: Set the shovel handling method for the right body.

 Normal: Under normal circumstances, the number of right-handed shovel


needles will be less than the setting in the craft order.

 Strict: The number of shovel needles is treated strictly according to the


process order.

 Cotton yarn brought in: set the way the cotton yarn is brought in after the end of
the body.

381
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

ordinary

ignore

Turning the needle

Turning needle 2

 Clamping sequence: Set the order in which the clips are applied, only for manual
designation.

382
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.6 loading and saving of process orders

The completed process order can be saved and loaded.The process sheet is
saved in the format ***.cxc.
The process sheet is loaded as shown below
load

 Load only process: load only the body, collar, cycle process and basic
information.
 Load parameters at the same time: In addition to loading the process
information, all advanced parameter settings are loaded at the same time.
 Export parameters: Save the advanced parameters of the process sheet to an
intermediate file with the suffix cxp.

383
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Import parameters: Import process order parameters in the backup file for
environment reuse.

8.6.1 Loading Hengqiang Process Sheet


 The interface file extension of the Hengqiang process sheet is named “.hcf”.
 Combined with Hengqiang process software.
 In the process single interface, the process data can be directly received by the
constant-strength process software without the need to exchange hcf files.

8.6.2 Loading Yijia Craft Sheet


 The interface file extension of the Yijia process sheet is named “.ehx”.
 After the process sheet is successfully loaded, the initial stitch number, rib
information, symmetry information, needle retention information, and process
data are automatically filled in.
 After loading, check the basic information with the "Check" button.
 For special crafts such as fashion models, contour maps can be generated into
the pattern for secondary modification.
 Yijia Technology Software will support this interface from the 11570 version, you
can consult its official website.www.chaoyuetech.com

8.6.3 Loading Sakura Craft Sheet


 The interface file suffix of the Sakura Craft Sheet is named “.hqf”.
 After the process sheet is successfully loaded, the initial stitch number, rib
information, symmetry information, needle retention information, retention
settings, and process data are automatically filled in.
 After loading, check the basic information with the "Check" button.
 Sakura brand process software will support this interface from version 3.0, you
can browse the official website of Shanghai Shuangjiu
Company.www.two-nine.comOr contact 13681762084, 15102159961.

384
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 In addition, the “.hqb” interface file is a reserved pattern, and the user can set
the pattern first in the process software.

 In addition, the “.hqi” interface file is the reserved intarsia graphics, and the user
can also set the intarsia in the process software first.

385
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.6.4 Loading the vPro process sheet


 The interface file extension of the vPro process sheet is named “.b2h”.
 After the process sheet is successfully loaded, the initial stitch number, rib
information, collar information, symmetry information, needle retention
information, and process data are automatically filled in.
 After loading, check the basic information with the "Check" button.
 The vPro process software will support this interface from the 2012 version. The
specific steps are as follows:
In the process single interface state, right click on the piece to
select “Show Piece Graphic” or “Save Interface File” to open the
“Piece Graphic” interface.
Click the “Save” button on the “Shape Graphic” interface, select
“Hengqiang Interface File”, pop up the save dialog box, enter the saved
file name, and save the “.b2h” format that can be directly read by
Hengqiang. Interface file.

386
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

save

387
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

8.6.5 Loading the Kamet Craft Sheet


 The interface file suffix of the Cammet process sheet is named ".scd".
 The Cammet process software will support this interface from version 6.0.
 The process file saved by the Cammet process software is the interface file.
 After selecting the scd file, the process of the front, back, and sleeve in the
process file will appear, and you can choose to import.

8.7 New construction of the craft list

Click the New button and a new process order entry form appears.

All process order information is set to the default value when you create a new one.
Please use it with caution.

8.8 Process Calculation

The process calculation is based on the craftsman's calculation process, which


quickly generates the process sheet data corresponding to the process, and then
generates a corresponding bmp pattern map from the process sheet.The tedious
388
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

process of calculating the process into a process sheet is eliminated, and the relative
deficiency is that the calculation function of the process is relatively simple and has
no complicated calculation method.Unable to handle special process types.
8.8.1 Entering process calculation
First enter the process list, then in the lower right corner of the process list, find
the process calculation button, click to enter.

After entering, you can see the process calculation chart.

8.8.2 Chart Description


389
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

style
Select the shoulder type of the garment, and calculate the front and back panels
and sleeves according to the type of shoulder.Style type is as follows
Sleeve back piece

390
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Location: Select the part of the piece.As shown in FIG


 Shape: choose the shape of the collar

391
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Unit: Select the unit to calculate the density.


 Turn / cm: revolutions per centimeter
 Turn / inch: revolutions per inch
 Horizontal density: horizontal tension
Set the tested body and the lateral tension of the sleeves.
 Straight dense: longitudinal pull
Set the tested body, sleeves, hem ribs, cuff ribs longitudinally.
Part
Enter the dimensions of each part of the piece.Clicking on the image on the right
side of each part will display the red size line.

 Chest width: the widest size of the clip


392
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Length: the overall length of the piece


 Shoulder width: the width between the shoulders
 Shoulder slant: (Use only in slant shoulders.) The default value is 3.Craftsman
size
 Straight shoulder: the height from the clip to the last shoulder
 Waist width: the minimum width of the waist
 Waist position: the height from the waist to the end of the shoulder
 Waist straight: the height of the waist width
 Hem width: the starting number of the piece
 Hem rib: rib length
 Collar width: the width of the collar after the needle is received
 Front collar depth: the width of the front collar to the height of the collar
 Back collar depth: the height of the back panel collar to the open collar
 Sleeve length: the total length of the sleeve
 Sleeve width: the width of the sleeve at the pinch (the widest position)
 Cuff width: sleeve opening width
 Sleeve Height: Sleeve clips to the final height
 Sleeve needles: the width of the last stitch of the sleeve
 Cuff ribbing: rib height of the sleeve
 Spread
Set the difference between the different sizes.
The system default size is 36 or s.Based on the input of this.Fill in the
corresponding difference and get the data of other sizes.Set several difference effect
diagrams as follows, as follows
The last step in the size of the process is to double-click on the size.The * with
the * is the final size process.

393
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 New
Create a new standard process calculation size, usually the system default 36
yards, or s code.

 Export
Export the process calculation file in .cxb format.Convenient to transfer copies.

394
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Import
Import the process calculation file in .cxb format.

 determine
Make sure to generate a process order file.
 cancel
Cancel the process calculation.
8.8.3 Parameter Settings
395
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Advanced parameter settings


Process calculation of advanced parameters.Generally, the skill of the master
adjusts the parameter value. Since the process calculation requires some empirical
parameters to make the process more accurate and reasonable, if there are some
differences or unsatisfactory when the process is input, the adjustment can be set
here.(The adjustment value is the number of stitches in the horizontal direction and
the number of revolutions in the vertical direction.) It is generally recommended to
use the system default parameter values.

 Side: number of stitches


 Stealing: stealing needles
 Rib: rib type selection
 Number of shovel needles: set the minimum number of needles
 Load: Load advanced parameters for different styles of craft

396
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Restore default value: restore the system default parameter value

 Width: Set the adjustment parameters for each width of the front piece.(Unit:
number of stitches)
 Length: Set the adjustment parameters for each length of the front piece.(Unit:
revolutions)
 Coefficient: The coefficient of the system calculation formula.
 Adjustment: Parameter adjustment value.
 Mark: Mark position adjustment value.

397
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Same piece

 Coefficient: sleeve part adjustment formula parameters


 Adjustment: adjust the number of stitches and the number of revolutions in the
sleeve
 Needle collection method: choose the way to process the needle
Size setting
Set the resulting size form and the number of sizes.There are two ways to choose
from, generally two common methods on the market: digital size and text size.

398
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Quantity: There are 10 sizes to choose from


 Interval: the value of each code interval
 Value: the setting value of the minimum code
 Generate: Click to generate the set size, click the above to generate the following

399
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Check the size you need to generate, such as xs/s/m/l, click to generate
 Check the click on the above image to generate the effect as follows

400
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

9. Small picture production


The user can set the thumbnail module information in the pattern, using the
following rules:
 Start with a line above the end line of the current pattern and fill in the color to
be defined. The color code must be between 120 and 183, which is consistent
with the user macro.
 Two lines up, starting from the third line to define specific action information,
 After all the action definitions are completed, two lines are made up, fill in the
custom number of colors, and use the color number to indicate
 Fill in the loop mark on the previous line, the color number is 1~3 (if it is
locked, you can leave it blank, if it is not filled, the default is 1)
 Then fill in the vertical translation number in the previous line, and use the
color number to indicate it.(If you do not need vertical translation, you can
leave it blank)
 Set the module identification, module page number, left and right translation
in l201, offset the number of stitches (do not fill if not needed).
 Set other pattern parameters.

The thumbnail module is defined as shown below:

 A small image module must contain at least four items: start line, weave action,
module color number, and module ID.
 Longitudinal translation and left and right translation are generally used in the
flat panel module.
 The user macro is just a simple representation of the small image, so the user
macro can be converted into a small image to represent.
 User macros and thumbnail modules cannot be used in the same line.
401
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 When the function line parameter value is not set in the knitting line of the
thumbnail, the corresponding parameter value in the pattern is used.
 Before making a small picture, you need to find the rule of the small picture,
that is, the smallest cycle unit.
 The 0th color does not participate in the expansion of the small image.
 The combination of the offset stitch number and the loop marker (1, 2)
indicates a shift to the right or an offset to the left.

9.1 basic small picture

The following real weave pattern can be seen by the "flat knitting machine
(template (expanding pattern) function.

402
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

9.2 flat small image (1)

 When the left and right panning function line is not set, the vertical panning
setting is invalid, and only the loop unrolling is performed at this time.

 Whether it is flat or left, it needs to be determined by the individual.


The following real weave pattern can be seen by the "flat knitting machine

403
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

(template (expanding pattern) function.

Or use the flat knitting tool to expand the pattern .

9.3 flattening small map (2)


The flattening of the above figure is not done on one line. The following is an
example of flattening in the same line.

404
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The following real weave pattern can be seen by the "flat knitting machine
(template (expanding pattern) function.

 The default is to flatten the left side and then flatten the right side.

9.4 flat small image (3)


In the above figure, the number of needles in the flattening is an even needle.
For an odd needle, there is a fixed needle stitching method above the number of
translation needles. The fixed color code in the small image will be shifted according
to the result of the translation. To, please refer to the example below.

405
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The following real weave pattern can be seen by the "flat knitting machine
(template (expanding pattern) function.

9.5 small map with offset stitch number


The number of offset stitches is generally used in the place where it is closed,
and it is used in conjunction with the cycle mark.

406
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The following real weave pattern can be seen by the "flat knitting machine
(template (expanding pattern) function.

 When the number of offset stitches is positive, it is generally used for pinning.
 When the number of offset stitches is negative, it is generally used for needle
addition.

407
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

9.6 single-sided plus jacquard thumbnail


 In general, a small map with alignment requirements between the up and down
is defined as a jacquard thumbnail.
 For a jacquard thumbnail, the value of the color number of the module in the
small image is required to be increased by 100, that is, if the number of color
code of the small image is 4, it is filled in 104.
 The number of color codes for each small picture in the jacquard area should
be equal.
 The yarn feeder associated with the jacquard must be kicked outside the
jacquard block.
 In the small picture, it is required to complete a yarn feeder cycle so that the
yarn feeder and the machine head return to the original position after the
small image is completed.
 The yarn feeders on the single-sided and jacquard connection areas should be
handled with care.
 The front and back weaving of the jacquard part should be filled according to
the rules of the jacquard requirements.

408
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The following real weave pattern can be seen by the "flat knitting machine
(template (expanding pattern) function.

409
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

9.7 drum kit thumbnail


 Add a 254-color code to the outside of the first line of the knitting action of
the small image for the bulge.
 Add to the left to indicate that the pattern is expanded to the upper right.
 Add to the right to indicate that the pattern is expanded to the left.
 Generally, the first page is used for the knitting line of the right line of the
machine head, and the second page is used for the knitting line of the left line
of the machine head.
 Only a small image of a color code is supported.
 If it is used in the weaving form, the drum kit should try not to use the yarn
feeder function line.
 If there is an ic/ij color code in the pattern, the drum chart will try to use the
ic/ij color code.

The following real weave pattern can be seen by the "flat knitting machine
(template (expanding pattern) function.

410
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Combined with the allowable partial thumbnail function in the compile option,
you can complete the drum kit drawing of the multi-yarn nozzle:

 A small picture of a drum kit in the intarsia.

411
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The small image should also be done with ic/ij color code:

The other two small images can be completed in the same way. Note that you need
to replace the ic color code.The expanded view is as follows:

412
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

9.8 small picture nesting


 The nested thumbnail color code is supported in the small image.
 You can nest up to 5 levels.

The following real weave pattern can be seen by the "flat knitting machine
(template (expanding pattern) function.

413
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

9.9 Decomposition process of a nested thumbnail (example)


 The following is an example of a flat drawing small picture to explain the
specific production method.

 In the first step, first find the smallest unit in the figure related to the number
of needles, there are the following two.

 The second step is to make a small picture of these two basic units.

 In the third step, the prepared small image is placed in the original
flat-receiving requirement map, and the reduced demanding diagram is as
follows.

414
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 In the fourth step, change this picture to a small picture.

 In the fifth step, the number of stitches in the above-mentioned small image is
combined, and the two color codes 131 and 133 appearing separately can be
fixed to the 130 and 132 color codes.

 In the sixth step, the color code of the flat thumbnail is used in the original
pattern.

415
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 In the seventh step, after the pattern is unfolded, check whether the final
weave pattern meets our requirements.

 In the eighth step, after confirming that there is no problem in the unfolding
picture, go back to the small picture drawn in the second and fifth steps, and
fill in the corresponding function line value.

416
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

9.10 supports multiple thumbnails in one line


 To support multiple thumbnails in a single line, the "Allow partial thumbnails"
option in the compile option must be ticked.
 The module IDs of some small images must be equal.
 The small image used first must be in front, and the default order of the small
image is drawn from bottom to top.
 The following example illustrates the use of multiple thumbnails in a row:
 The first step is to draw a 5-line drum kit

 The second cloth, draw a 3 line drum kit thumbnail

 The third step is to draw a small figure of 3 twists 3

 Fourth cloth, use the above three small pictures in the original pattern
417
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The fifth step, expand the results

9.11 delete the expanded empty line

 The save file must be set, otherwise there will be problems with the
compilation.
 When the thumbnail is expanded, if a blank line appears, it can be deleted by
the "Delete Expanded Blank Line" switch.

418
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The following real weave pattern can be seen by the "flat knitting machine
(template (expanding pattern) function.

 Set the "Delete expanded small empty line" switch.

 Cancel the "Delete expanded small line" switch.

 The switch needs to be set according to the actual situation.

9.12 small map save


 You can save the thumbnail in the "Save" function of the right-click menu.
 Select the range of the thumbnail before saving.
 Note that you should check "Do you want to include a function line" when
419
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

saving.
 After saving, you should save the customized template through the template
(custom (other (export) function) to avoid being overwritten after the system
upgrade.
 You can import saved template files into the system via "Template (Custom
(Other) (Import) function.

420
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

10. Upper area and tools

10.1 Description of the area map


It is recommended to automatically build the area with Hengqiang image processing.

Each area is filled with its own loop, drawing, convenient for later modification,
grading.
It can perfectly match the module fill mark 11-12-13 mark in the previous picture
process, and automatically match to the area attribute.

421
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

10.2 Upper Area Tool Description


Mainly for setting and editing the area basemap in the area layer, the domain tool is
located in the right navigation bar, and the lock can be popped up.

422
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

1. Regional selection

Regional selection
Click on any layer to display the area of ​ ​ the corresponding range.
The following figure shows the comparison before and after selection (only for
area range view)

2. Drawing area

423
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Drawing area
Use the polyline method to draw the area range. After double-clicking the end
drawing, a new area is automatically generated in the area layer and area list.
Drawing method such as broken line drawing:

3. Area brush adjustment

Area brush adjustment


Use the brush to adjust the extent of the enlarged area, and expanding the new
range will automatically fill the pattern within the area.
The operation is as follows:
(1) Selection tool
(2) Click anywhere in the area and click the left mouse button to confirm seven
points.
(3) Move the cursor, the cursor moves the track to the new edge of the area
(4) After finalizing, release the left mouse button and the area will be automatically
enlarged.
(5) The end point and the bottom must be within the area

4. Area basemap movement

Area basemap movement


In the pattern layer, the basemap movement adjustment is performed on the
area that has been filled.
The movement of the area basemap can move the base map of the entire area, or

424
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

move the base map to a certain part of the Unicom.


Steps:
(1) Selection tool
(2) Left mouse click on the area to be adjusted, you can release the left button to
move, after confirming the adjustment position, click the left mouse button to
confirm.

5. Area fill

Area fill
The current color code of the selection area is filled in the area and is only valid
for the pattern layer.

6. Area fill copy area

Area fill copy area


Fill a region of the pattern layer with the copied small image.Only valid for
pattern layers.
Steps:
(1) Select the minimum loop to copy
(2) Select the area fill copy area tool
(3) Click on the area of ​ ​ the pattern layer to fill, determine the fill position and
then left click to confirm.

7. Area basemap color change

Area basemap color change


The color code in the area is color-changed, and any layer can be operated.
Select the tool, left-click on the area you want to change color, and pop up the
color change window to change the color.

8. Regional adjustment

425
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Regional adjustment
Click on the tool to bring up the Properties window:
Zoom in or out in the direction of the setting, the default pin size is 1 pin

9. Shoe grading

Shoe grading
Zoom in or out on the current upper based on the rank or size ratio.Clicking on
the icon will bring up the following window:
1) Item size: Width/Height: The width/height of the current upper area;
2) Target size: width/height: width/height of the adjusted upper area;
3) Size adjustment: automatically calculate the number of stitches and the number
of lines after scaling according to the size ratio of the input;
4) Number of waste yarn turns: end waste yarn revolutions;
5) Rib rotation: starting idling revolution, generally set to 0;
6) Main yarn feeder: two main yarns can be set separately;
7) Waste yarn feeder: 2 waste yarns can be set separately;
8) Waste yarn bottoming: the beginning of the waste yarn to break the line mode;
9) Waste yarn mode: There are two modes of large goods and proofing.

426
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

10. Upper cutting

Upper cutting
The needle type and the normal type upper can be automatically adjusted, and
clicking the icon will pop up the following window;
1) Number of starting stitches: can be calculated automatically or
manually.Manual input can only be made when the needle type is selected;
2) Waste yarn bottom: There are two modes of four flat knitting and thick
knitting;
3) Edge protection: the needle type is effective, indicating the number of
stitches outside the contour of the upper;
4) Number of waste yarns: the number of revolutions of the end waste yarn;
5) Waste yarn feeder 1/2: Set the yarn feeder of waste yarn.If the waste
yarn feeder 2 is set to 0, only one waste yarn is woven.
6) Idling seam: The set color code locks the left and right edges and is often
applied to the organization of the air layer.
7) Upper type: select the type of upper after conversion;
8) Note: The upper with the area map can be converted to a type; the edge
of the area must have 1 color.

427
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

11. Regional construction

Regional construction
A new region build for the region map, valid only for the region layer.
Steps:
(1) Draw a range of areas in the area map;
(2) Select the area builder and left click on the color range to build the area;
(3) Multiple areas that are not connected can be added and merged using the ctrl
key;
(4) The area code is automatically incremented from 1; it is recommended to build
the area by color, and the same color area may construct errors.

12. Regional property settings

Regional property settings


View the properties in each area of ​ ​ the pattern, set, and only valid for the
pattern layer.
Click the area property tool, click the pattern layer area, the property window of
the area will pop up, you can view and edit the base map, clearing side settings, etc.
of the area.In the case of opening the area property setting window, you can click the
other area to switch area properties directly in the drawing area.

428
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Generally, the default selection tool is used. After selecting the range of the area, you
can right-click to set the fill attribute and add the complete module.

1) Add a circled area to the full module: set the minimum module for
saving integrity. In the main drawing, the incomplete module is replaced with a
clear color;
2) Fill the area with the selection area: change the minimum loop of the
area basemap to the selection area content;

On the "Complete Module Preview" page, you can view and delete the added
complete module, as shown below:

13. Upper half molding

429
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Upper half molding


Used in the production of upper half molding.Click the “Shoe Half Forming” icon
to pop up the semi-formed window of the upper, as shown below

Number of ribbed lines: can be set manually according to demand


Number of rib stitches: can be manually set according to demand

(1) Import: You can import bmp film images for later operations.

(2) Rib Selection: Double-click the rib color in the view area to get the number of

430
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

stitches and the number of lines.And at least one horizontal dividing line is
generated and displayed in the dividing line list;
Note: The ribbing of the upper is indicated by a separate color area.

(3) Split line list: Displays the name of the split line generated by the automatic
generation or manual “split line”. The corresponding split line can be deleted
through the right-click menu.
(4) Split line: draws a line dividing line in the view area. Currently, the dividing line
can only be drawn on the right side of the upper.During the drawing process, the
mouse wheel cannot be zoomed to zoom the view area.Note: The split line is
usually tangent to the radiant arc and the split line intersects the rib line and the
right side of the upper.

(5) Split: Splits the upper into sections based on automatically generated and

431
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

manually drawn split lines.The usually split part is the partially woven part of the
semi-formed upper, as shown below

(6) Move: Left click on the local weave block in the view area, and hold down the
mouse to drag the partial weave block;
(7) Rotation: Click on the partial weaving block, turn the cursor, and the partial
weaving block rotates as the cursor rotates;
(8) Sorting: The knitting order of the two partial braids and the toe can be
adjusted.Arranged from bottom to top according to the size of the number,
when the numbers are equal, the peers weave;
(9) Restore: restore the upper from the split state to the unsplit original state,
retaining the selected rib color and dividing line;
(10) Transfer to plate: according to the image size and the set density, the
semi-molding is transferred into the plate making, and the partial upper pattern
and partial weaving are modified as needed;
Note: 1) The moving and rotating tools only operate on the partial weave block on
the right side of the upper.
2) The end points of the partial weave block should be aligned with the
ribbed end points and the end points of the toe cap, respectively.

Right click attribute


Right-click in the view area and the context menu will pop up.
1) Paste: Paste the copied area for semi-molding.
2) Upper tangent alignment: the last behavioral level state of the local braid;
3) Lower tangential alignment: the first behavioral level of the local braid; the
length is the same as the rib of the shoe shank
4) Local Distortion: Effective only for the lowest local knit block, the local knit shape
is twisted into a state that is aligned with the rib end.

432
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

10. 3 Area List Description


Display or edit the area in the area map.

: Whether to display the area range, the default display area range;

: Show or hide the area column


Select an area to edit the area properties selected by the right button.

(1) Area fill setting: set the attribute of the current selection area, scroll the mouse
in the view area to zoom in and out;

433
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Clear Edge: Set the color to clear the edges

(2) Copy attributes: copy the current area attributes, including fill patterns,
complete modules, clear edges, etc.
(3) Paste attribute: Paste the copied area attribute into the area;
(4) Delete area: delete the currently selected area, and the pattern content is
retained;
(5) Clear area: delete the currently selected area and delete the pattern content;
(6) Matching attributes: Quickly match the area attributes in the two pattern files;

434
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

11. Work area


This function is convenient for viewing whether the generated action file
is complete, such as the drawing board number, yarn feeder number, motion,
scissors, auxiliary materials, etc., and can also be appropriately modified here.
Open the method, move the cursor to the workspace button on the right
side of the drawing area for two seconds, or open it via the view in the menu
bar - Toolbar - Workspace.
Two system cnt file view as shown

11.1 Loading hcd

 Click the read action and select the hcd file you want to open.
 After hcd is successfully loaded, the system will simultaneously load the pat data
into the pattern.
 After the pattern is compiled successfully, the system will also load the hcd

435
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

action immediately.
 Double-click the specified line in the pattern, cnt will automatically jump to the
corresponding line action line, the corresponding pat line will flash.
 Double-click the specified line in pat, cnt will automatically jump to the
corresponding line action line, and the corresponding pattern line will flash.
 Wrap in cnt, the pattern and pat will flash on the corresponding line.

 After cnt is modified, you can save the update by saving the action button.
 After the pat map is modified, the update can be saved by the "flat plane (Save
Pattern) function.

11.2 Simulation function

436
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 These functions can only be performed if there is action information.


 The function menu is under the cnt line number button.

11.2.1 Simulation
 Generate a simulated needle diagram of the pattern.

 Double-click the specified action information, cnt will automatically jump to the
corresponding row action line, the corresponding pat line and pattern line will
flash.
 "f10" is used as a shortcut switch for the size icon. Currently, a total of four files
are supported.
 Each line of action has a line of simulations displayed.
 Click on the coil to display the history of the coil's presence, indicated by the red
selection box, until the doffing or being covered by other coils.
 The system information, the shaker, the head direction, the action line, and the
pattern line number are displayed in the action information.
 When the yarn feeder is wide, the yarn feeder information dot will display two
yarn feeder numbers.
 The simulation map can be moved by the mouse wheel, the scroll wheel + Shift
key, the up and down left and right arrows, and the scroll bar.
437
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The maximum number of needles supported by a 16-pin shaker is displayed.


 When the mouse is over the current coil, a message appears, showing the shaker
information and the action name.

 When there is a possibility of suspicious actions, there will be corresponding


prompts when generating the simulation map, and these suspicious simulation
lines can be located through the right-click menu.

 At the same time, you can also determine the possibility of partial strike. Please
carefully check the yarn feeder position of the striker position. Do not easily use
the machine to proof. If it is an intarsia yarn feeder, you can ignore this
information.

438
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

It is indicated here that the ## yarn feeder may have passed through the 1# yarn
feeder, causing a collision of the striker.
 For the case of a striker, the line where the yarn feeder is located can be
positioned via the menu "Associated position".
 Advanced settings: You can set the configuration information of the simulation
map.
 switch:
 Proportion: When moving the simulation map through PgUp, PgDn, Home, End,
press this setting to jump to the corresponding number of lines or the number of
stitches;
 Grid: Displays the vertical grid and the front and back bed split lines in the
simulation.
 Yarn feeder parking point: used to set the current yarn feeder parking
information.
 Fixed: Calculate the parking point by the number of fixed parking pins.
 Settings: You can set the left and right row parking point information of each
group of yarn feeders.

439
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 New coil: the color of the newly woven coil.If "Enable yarn feeder color" has
been set, the color corresponding to the yarn feeder is used to display the new
stitch.
 Old coil: The color of the woven coil.
 Turn the needle: the color of the needle symbol.
 Knitting yarn: The color line of the yarn feeder movement.
 Overlap: The color of the stitches when turning the needle.
 Background color: The background color of the analog coil map.
 Needle: The color of the stitch that the needle is pressed.
 Selected: Select the color of the selection box of the coil.
 Error: The color of the error symbol.
 Starting parking point: The starting point of the current yarn feeder.
 End parking point: The end point of the current yarn feeder.

440
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Actual parking point: Calculate the actual parking point position of the yarn
feeder obtained from the yarn feeder parking point information.
 Shaker: The color of the shaker needle.
 Adding a needle: the color of the stitch of the needle when knitting.
 Yarn ratio: The ratio of the length of the yarn can be counted.

 Except for waste yarn: waste yarn is not counted in the statistical ratio, and
waste yarn is defined as the yarn feeder used in the first two lines.

11.2.2 Statistics
 Count the number of empty lines, the total number of lines, the percentage
of empty lines, the number of yarn feeders, and the weaving efficiency of
cnt.
 Weaving efficiency = number of effective systems / total number of systems.

441
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 In general, the lower the weaving efficiency, the more likely it is to be


optimized.
 Double-click on a specific row in the blank row list to locate the cnt to the
blank row.
 It can be judged according to the maximum number of shaker needles
whether it can be woven on the corresponding machine.
 Estimated weaving time.

11.2.3 Find
 Find the cnt line that meets the criteria. After entering the combination
condition in the query condition window, click the Find button to list all cnt
lines that meet the condition.

442
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Double-click the list of cnt lines found, and cnt automatically locates the line.
11.2.4 Positioning
 Enter the cnt line number to jump to, and click cnt to automatically jump to
the line.
 Can not be greater than the total number of lines of cnt.

11.2.5 Flower Edition


 According to the input pattern line number, locate the corresponding cnt
line.
 Cannot be greater than the total number of pat lines.

443
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

11.2.6 Cycle
 Set the loop information of cnt.
 The number of loops can exceed 199, which corrects the deficiencies in the
function line.
 The loop start page must be an odd number.
 The loop end page must be an even number.
 The file saved by the loop information is a prm file.

11.2.7 degree
 Display the segmentation information of the cnt action line.
 The segmentation degree is set in the degree view.
 Can play a multi-stage effect in a weaving line.

444
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The weaving efficiency can be improved by multi-stage.


11.2.8 Parking
 Display the parking sign in the cnt action.
 The parking sign is set in the function line "Yarn feeder parking point".

 After editing the changes, click "OK".


11.2.9 mark
 Record the decomposition marks in the cnt action.
 The token is automatically generated by the system and is for reference only.

445
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 y means "yes" and n means "no".Indicates whether there is a corresponding


action in the cnt action line.

11.2.10 simulation
 The yarn physical map can be used to simulate the weaving effect of the
current pattern.
 The yarn color of the yarn feeder can be set before the simulation.
 The default yarn color of the system can be restored by the reset button.

 The front simulation effect is shown below:

446
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Click on the "back bed" to see the simulation on the back:

 The simulation image can be scaled by ctrl + left mouse button (right
button).
447
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Export jpg image: Automatically generate a jpg file with the same name as
the pattern.
 You can set the pre- and post-simulation of the priority simulation.

11.3 Editing cnt

11.3.1 Direct modification


 Only the "Save Action" button after modification can be executed.
 You can directly edit the cnt yarn feeder number and needle information.
 Double-click on the "front and rear bed weaving action" to modify the
current action type.

448
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 To provoke: pick a half-eye action;


 Falling cloth: handle the falling cloth at the needle height of the turning
position (not all machines can execute);
 Gao Bian: Perform knitting at the needle height of the needle position (not
all machines can perform);
 False needle: the needle is pressed but the coil is not moving (not all
machines can perform);
 Pressing the needle: without the yarn feeder, the height of the eye is
lowered, and the eye triangle is excessive.(or directly out the needle height);
 Tight editing: tight-fitting action corresponding to the coarse eye
 Loose crane: loose hanging action corresponding to tight hanging
 You can drag the mouse to directly modify the control information.

449
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 You can set the clipper control information for the backplane.

11.3.2 Action Editing


 In the action panel, the edit menu of cnt appears in the right mouse button.

 Undo, copy, cut, paste, clear: consistent with normal operations.


 Interchange: Swap the cnt actions of the two systems.
 Only swap system actions in the current action line.
 Single systems do not support interchange.
 If it is a dual system, it is directly interchangeable.
 If it is a three system, the interface for selecting the interchange system
appears.

 Fixed: Fix the cnt action to a specified system for execution.


 Single systems do not support pinning.
 Only the cnt line where the system without motion is located can be fixed.
 A range of cnt lines can be fixed.

450
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

11.3.3 Parameter editing


 Edit the action parameters: speed, roll, raw gram, presser foot, clip line, pay
line, scissors, etc.
 These parameters can be modified by clicking, dragging, or double clicking
the mouse.
 After editing, you need to use the "Save Action" function to achieve the
modified effect.
 Generally do not modify the work area.

11.4 Working parameters

This function is used to set or modify the specific working parameter value on
the flat knitting machine on the pc end.
 When all values ​ ​ in a parameter are zero, they are not passed into the
flat knitting machine.
 When you cancel the save to the machine, the working parameters are not
transferred to the flat knitting machine.

451
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Starting stitches: The number of starting knitting stitches for the pattern.
 Degree group setting: Set the value of the left and right rows under each
segment of each system.

 Default: Set all degrees to the default value, the same below.
 Clear: Set all the values ​ ​ to zero, the same below.

452
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The degree of the left line, the right line, the front bed, and the back
bed of each system can be set.
 Main roll group setting: Set the roll value of each segment.
 Sub-roll group setting: Set the sub-roll value of each segment.
 Sub-roll Closing Group Settings: Set the sub-roll closing value for each
segment.
 Set the bottom plate roll group: Set the bottom plate roll value of each
segment.
 Other roll group settings: Not used yet.
 Main motor speed group setting: Set the motor speed value of each
segment.
 Yarn feeder parking position setting: Set the parking point value of each yarn
feeder to the left and right rows.

 l indicates that the yarn feeder is used in the left row, and r indicates
that the yarn feeder is used in the right row.
 Raw grams set: set the raw grams of each segment.
 Yarn feeder parking correction setting: Set the left and right yarn feeder
parking point correction values ​ ​ of the yarn feeder.
 A negative number indicates a correction in the opposite direction.
 Kinematic setting: Set the pitch value of each segment.
 Yarn feeder speed setting: Set the yarn feeder speed value of each segment.
 Slow speed roller setting: Set the slow speed roller value of each segment.
 Pattern Description: Set a supplementary description of the pattern.

453
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Save to machine: check it and bring it to hcd file


 It is forbidden to modify the parameters: after checking, the lower computer
cannot modify the working parameters.
11.4.1 Open
Supports opening working parameters of three file formats: wok, sav, and hcd.

 When the working parameters are turned on, it will affect the working
parameter setting of the current pattern.
11.4.2 Save
 After the working parameters are modified, they can be directly modified and
saved to the original parameter file.
 The new generation system will also use and pass these parameters in the new
hcd file generated after compilation.
11.4.3 Default
 Set all working parameters to their default values.

454
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

11.5 module

This feature is used to visually display saved modules and can be used directly.

 Different types of modules can be selected.


 The module file in the specified directory can be displayed.
 Click on the module image to use it in the drawing area.
 Display System Template: Displays the template that comes with the plate
making system.
 Show personal template: Show templates that you have added yourself.

How to make a personal template:


 Draw and save the template in the pattern;
 Draw a visual simulation of the template, save it in jpg format, and name it the
template;
 Save the JPG file to the "Modules" directory of the plate making system.
455
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 If it is a tpf file, save the jpg and tpl files in the same directory.

456
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

11.6 Open history

This function is used to record the pattern history that the software has opened,
and the pattern is within one year.

 Double-click the historical pattern to open the pattern directly.


 Double-click the time period to expand or converge all the pattern records in the
period.
 Copy Name: Copy the pattern file name.
 Copy path: Copy the pattern and its full path name.
 Open folder: Enter the folder for the pattern.

457
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

12. Local jacquard making


12.1 basic pattern
 Make basic patterns in the pattern view.

12.2 Jacquard pattern


 Copy the portion of the jacquard area in the pattern view to the intarsia view.
 Make a partial jacquard pattern in the intarsia view.
 The imported image is converted into a jacquard effect image after multicolor
conversion.
 Then use the color change tool to convert the color code to the corresponding
yarn feeder number to be used.

458
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 In the braided form function line, the corresponding partial jacquard and its yarn
feeder group are set according to the color code number of the jacquard.At this
time, the effect of the jacquard backstage except for the custom setting is the
same, because the actual backstage effect is set in the jacquard organization
chart.

 It is best to set the yarn feeder group information for different jacquards.

459
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

12.3 Jacquard backstage


 The backing tissue of the local jacquard must be set in the jacquard organization
chart.
 Copy the intarsia view to the jacquard organization view.
 Set the back table of the partial jacquard area in the jacquard organization view.
 Empty the non-local jacquard part.
 That is to say, the scope of the jacquard backstage is the local jacquard range.
 This also means that outside the range of the local jacquard backing is a
single-sided structure, and the yarn feeder number is specified in the summer
view of the intarsia.
 Multiple different jacquard backs can be set in the jacquard organization chart.
 The color number in the jacquard organization chart indicates the back table
form, that is, 1~18, which are the same as the second column function line in the
weaving form, that is, the empty needle ~ grid, plus 100 means the reverse side
jacquard.

460
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 For a jacquard backing that has a similar v-shaped effect, it can be corrected by
the flat knitting machine tool "correcting the jacquard organization chart".
 Correct the partial default backstage organization to the back of the v-shaped
left side.
 This feature does not currently correct the jacquard organization view of
multiple partial jacquards.

12.4 Jacquard
 Generally speaking, the degree of the jacquard part is different from that of the
one side of the two sides. This can be set in the "degree function line (the local
jacquard time)".

461
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 If you want to specify a different degree for each segment, you can specify it in
the degree view.
 It will be required to copy the different parts from the jacquard organization
view to the degree view.
 The color number in the degree view indicates the number of degrees, which is
equivalent to the setting in the function line.
 Since the variability requires the support of high-speed motors and electronic
control, it is currently only possible to support a period of time on a complete
partial jacquard line. This function is very effective in multiple partial jacquards.

 At this point, a basic partial jacquard pattern has been completed and can be
entered into the compilation process.
12.5 pieces of jacquard
 Let's talk about how to further complete the pattern of multiple partial
jacquards on a line.
 Multiple partial jacquards must be woven in a 171-color partial jacquard.The
intarsia yarn feeder is in the form of a 172 weave.
 The specific number of jacquard colors should be determined according to the
number of color codes in the current page.
 First, the basic pattern is created in the pattern view.
 Secondly, a number of partial jacquard patterns are completed in the intarsia

462
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

chart.

 Then set up multiple partial jacquard function lines, you must use 171
multi-color partial jacquard.

 And set the yarn feeder group, in which case all yarn feeder information can be
combined into one yarn feeder group information.The plate making system will
select the appropriate yarn feeder weaving according to the current line of the
intarsia.

463
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Then copy the partial jacquard part to the jacquard organization chart, where
the back table of the jacquard is set

 In this case, if you want to use different segmentation degrees, you can copy the
jacquard organization view into the degree view and set the appropriate degree
segment in the degree view.
 If the segmentation degree is not set in the degree view, the one-sided portion
performs the knitting time segment, and the partial jacquard portion performs
the partial jacquard time segment.

464
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 So far, a number of partial jacquards have been basically completed.


12.6 Jacquard area map
 Finally, if you want to implement two local jacquards next to each other, then we
need to use a jacquard area map to distinguish different jacquard areas.
 If each part of the local jacquard is independent, then there is no need to make a
jacquard area map.
 The same and adjacent color code in the jacquard area map indicates that it
belongs to the same partial jacquard block.

465
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

12.7 Jacquard yarn feeder


 Since the jacquard color numbers of the two jacquard forms of 171 and 172 are
judged from the number of color codes in the intarsia chart, this method has
certain limitations, and it cannot express the yarn feeder and the lycra yarn
feeder which are completely woven on the back table. .A new jacquard yarn
feeder drawing is added to indicate the yarn feeder group definition for different
jacquard ranges.
 A plurality of partial jacquard patterns are completed in the intarsia chart.

466
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Set different jacquard yarn feeder groups

 Set the corresponding yarn feeder group number in the jacquard yarn feeder
drawing.

467
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 This ensures that the four-color jacquard of the 3#, 4#, 5#, and 6# yarn feeders
and the Leicas of the 7# yarn feeder are executed in the local jacquard range on
the left side; and 11# is performed in the partial jacquard range on the right side.
Four-color jacquard for 12#, 17#, 6# yarn feeders, and Leicas for 13# yarn
feeders.

12.8 ic/ij color code


 The ic color code is used for the single-sided weave portion, and the number
indicates the yarn feeder number of the single-sided weave.
 The ij color code is used for the jacquard weaving portion, and the number
indicates the color code of the jacquard area.
 Ic/ij is only used for weaving forms such as intarsia, jacquard, and partial
jacquard.
 The default weaving action for ic/ij is front weaving.
 To perform the non-pre-weaving action, the new action color code can be drawn
directly between the ic/ij color codes. In this case, it is only necessary to ensure
that the left and right sides of the color code are the same ic/ij color code.

468
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 If the left and right of the new action are different ic/ij color codes, the action
needs to be drawn in the intarsia view of the corresponding position.

 To enable the ic/ij color code, the user macro function line of the line must be
set to 99, otherwise it is still considered to be a small color code.

 The jacquard area indicated by the ij color code, if there is a different back stage,
also needs to be set in the jacquard organization chart.Different jacquard areas
and jacquard yarn feeder sets also need to be set in their respective views.The
setting method of other yarn feeder sets and the like is also the same as the
conventional method.

469
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

13. Pattern compilation


The machine control file is automatically generated for the pattern, and the flat
machine lower machine control file such as hcd is generated.
If you do not save before compiling, it will automatically prompt to save.
The direction of the yarn feeder will be displayed automatically after successful
compilation.
After the compilation is successful, the new cnt and pat information is loaded.
If an error is found during the compilation process, the corresponding error
message and error will be prompted. If there is still a problem, please contact us
in time.
The minimum size of the pattern is required to be 32*32.
Partial compilation parameter options are defined by the client before
compilation.
If the yarn feeder does not return to its original position, the system will give a
warning message.

If the last line is on the right, the system will also give a warning message and
automatically insert a blank line to bring the handpiece back to the left.

Relevant statistics will be displayed after successful compilation.

470
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Among them, high, medium and low speed, according to 90, 70, 50, because of
different machines, different processes, there will be some errors, the estimated
weaving time is for reference only.
If you are a bottoming machine and do not yarn out all the yarn feeders, you will
have the following message.

471
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

13.1 ADVANCED OPTIONS


General options for setting up compilation.

 Check before compiling: Check the legality of the pattern. If the following
warning message appears, you can try to turn off the check switch.

If you select a simple single-system flat knitting machine model, it will be judged
whether the knitting hooks and other actions are performed on the same line.At
this point you need to determine if the model is selected correctly.
472
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Save Expand File: Automatically saves the expanded file of the pattern with the
thumbnail.If set, in the pattern file containing the thumbnail, a _exp.pds file with
the same name will appear after compilation.You can edit the pattern file again.
 Clipping linkage: The combination of scissors and clips must be set according to
the characteristics of the machine.
 The front and rear beds are respectively turned: the front and back are not
executed in one system, and are suitable for some simple machines without
inserts.
 1x1 conversion: 1x1 pattern must be set, and 1x1 is also processed after normal
pattern setting.
 Motion optimization: optimize the movement of the machine head.

 Left: Move each system action as far as possible to the left system to
execute;
 Right: Move each system action as far as possible to the right system to
execute;
 Auto: Automatically optimizes the head travel based on the machine's
needle value per inch.When you know the number of needles in your
machine, it is recommended to use an automatic method to optimize the
stroke.
 Combine the knitting needle movement: Allow the knitting and turning action to
be performed in one action line. Cancel the setting to adapt to some machines
that cannot be divided into systems, or patterns with special requirements.
 Combine the maximum number of stitches: When the needle stitching action is
allowed to be combined, the number of shaker needles when the needle is
473
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

turned over is not merged.


 Shaker: Set the hard shaker condition of the machine.This setting has an effect
on the combined knitting turn and needs to be set correctly.

 Ignore: Indicates that all three shaker conditions are possible.


 Combine braided rows of different weaving speeds: Allow braided rows with
different weaving speed requirements to be executed in one action row.The
weaving elements judged are: speed, roll, sub-roll, sub-roller switch, bottom
roller, other rollers, pitch, yarn feeder parking point, and the like.
 Weaving speed priority: After combining the knitting needle turning action, the
knitting speed segment is preferentially executed.Unchecked to execute the
needle speed segment
 191-198 Color: It can be dynamically switched whether the eight front and rear
stitch color codes are pre-weaving, post-weaving or four-flat knitting.
 The presser foot is only effective when turning the needle: the function line that
enables the presser foot is activated when the needle is turned, and it is
ineffective when knitting.
 Compile to cnt: Compile the pattern to the machine file in cnt format.
 Old format machine types can be checked by this option to generate action
files.
 The old version of 960 requires network compilation, the new version and
980 cancel the network compilation, and can be executed locally.
 Automatic yarn feeder in braided form: Whether the yarn feeder is brought in
and out automatically.Closing this option requires the same manual feeding of
the yarn feeder as the 8 yarn feeders.
 After closing, the knotting function cannot be used;
 After closing, the yarn feeder can not be used;
 After closing, the local jacquard cannot be used;
 After the closure, the intarsia float cannot be used;
474
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 After the closure, the intarsia optimization cannot be used;


 After closing, the yarn feeder is brought in and taken out automatically and
cannot be used;
 After closing, the single-sided jacquard and jacquard can not be used;
 The pinch function cannot be used after closing;
 After shutting down, many new generation features will not be available.
 Expanding savings (2): For special needs, for the saving (2) setting, the loop is not
represented in the prm file, but the machine action is directly expanded directly
in the cnt.
 Line number detection, stroke detection, striker detection, alignment detection:
Compiled detection process, closing can save compile time.
 Display compilation information: The warnings and prompts generated during
the compilation process are displayed uniformly after compilation.

 Print: This statistic can be printed out.


 Copy: Copy the compilation information to the pasteboard.
 Automatically generate simulation pictures: After the compilation is successful,
the jpg simulation file with the same name as the pattern is automatically
generated in the background. The simulation picture is generally generated
within 10 seconds after the compilation is completed, and can be waited for.
 Automatically generate bmp: only generate bmp view images in the pattern.
475
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Solution list: List the default schemes that come with the system, as well as the
custom saved schemes. Double-click the scheme to automatically load and
display the currently loaded scheme in large red font.

 Pink bottom scheme behavior custom scheme;


 Cyan bottom scheme behavior system comes with a scheme;
 The customized scenario save directory is set in the advanced parameters.
 Load compile option: Loads the previous compile option saved with the pattern
into the current build environment, allowing the system to reproduce the
compilation at that time.

 Load: load the compilation options of the current pattern into the system;
 Export: Export the current compilation options to the file, so that the
compilation environment can be used on other machines; the compile
option file has the suffix cop;
 Import: Import the compilation environment from the file into the current
system.
 Restore Defaults: Restores the system's standard compile option
configuration.
 Machine type: The current machine type and its parameters can be reset.

476
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

477
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

13.2 AUTOMATIC PROCESSING OPTIONS

Options for setting up automatic processing.

 Automatic yarn output: Automatic processing of yarn exit, thread clamping and
scissors after the pattern knitting is completed.

 Yarn out when weaving: When the yarn feeder is the last weaving, the yarn
exiting process is automatically performed;
 At the end of the yarn exit: automatically perform the yarn exit processing of
each yarn feeder when the pattern knitting is completed;

478
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

note:
 1# clips and scissors for handling elastic yarns must be set by themselves;
 The yarn output will be processed automatically only after setting the 1# clip
and scissors;
 The yarn that has been hand-spun will not be automatically pulled out again.
 Falling cloth area clip: The bottom board pattern is cut and clipped in the final
drop area.
 Yarn feeder follow-up: When the number of stitches for the pattern reaches the
specified number of stitches, the yarn feeder that is used later will automatically
follow the stitching action of the pattern.

479
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 It will automatically follow only when the cumulative pin count is greater
than the number of followers.
 The following action is performed after the pinning action.
 When the number of followers is 0, it does not automatically follow.
 The second number of followers indicates the number of kicks after the
follow.
 The yarn feeder is automatically brought into place at one time when the
needle is added.
 Waste yarn follow-up: Similar to the yarn feeder follow-up function, it only works
for the waste yarn feeder. The waste yarn feeder is defined as the yarn feeder
that starts the bird's eye waste yarn, and the others are used as the conventional
yarn feeder.
 Follow mode: Action processing when the yarn feeder is following.

 Knitting yarn feeder: The conventional yarn feeder follows.


 The introduction method of the introduction tower summer: according to
the introduction method of the introduction tower summer, it is generally
used for the jacquard part and the return part.
480
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 After 1x1: 1x1 weaving method of the back bed, the needle is automatically
judged before and after the bed.
 The new function can set which follow-up mode is used in a certain line in
the function line 205.

 Knot color code: Knot the specific action performed by the yarn feeder specified
in the knot function line.

481
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The knotting action can be performed automatically on the left or right side
according to the position of the knotting yarn feeder.
 The knotting action is performed after the current pattern line is completed.
 Knotting action should not be done on the pinning line.
 The knotting function line should be inserted as much as possible according
to the idle condition of the current system.
 You can choose "tuck", "weaving", "kicking yarn", "weaving (2)", "weaving,
hanging", "tuck (2)", "weaving (3)", " Tuck, weave, weave (4), tuck, weave (2),
knit yarn (2), weave (5), weave, tangle (2), Weaving (6)", "shoe bird eye" and
other methods to perform the knotting action.

482
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Among them: "Weaving (5)" is only used for knotting in four parallel
situations.
"Shoe eye" is used for knotting in the upper pattern.
 When there is a need to tie the sting on the edge of the needle, you can
change the color code to 242# color code.
 When there is a wide yarn feeder in the knotting yarn feeder, it will
automatically merge into a double yarn feeder knot.
 Range: Only the number of stitches beyond the set range will be segmented in
one line, otherwise it will be ignored.
 Falling cloth method: Falling at the designated needle position.
 Weaving position: the normal weaving position is carried out.
 Turning the needle position: the needle height of the needle is dropped.At
this time, the a-bit action in cnt is displayed as falling.

 Pressing mode: Set the machine to perform different pinning actions.


 Hanging position: Press the needle at the normal lifting position.
 Pressing pin position: The new station, according to the manufacturer's
483
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

configuration, generally similar to the pin action, can be executed according


to different needs or not.At this time, the h-bit action of cnt is displayed as a
press pin.

 Rough mode: Set the triangle action of the two-stage weaving.


 Loose: performing a triangular motion of two-stage weaving;
 Tight: performing a triangular motion of tight weaving;
 Number of needles for automatic needle reduction: When calculating the needle
position of the automatic needle, you can specify the number of fixed stitches on
the left and right sides and the number of fixed stitches in the middle do not
participate in the calculation.That is, in the case where the number of stitches is
retained, the position of the retracted needle is calculated using the remaining
number of stitches.
 The number of fixed pins in the middle is generally only applicable to the
automatic shrink pin 1.
 Generally, when there is a fixed tissue on both sides of the pattern, there is
no shrinkage action inside the tissue.
 Needle shaker needle number: The maximum number of shaker needles that can
be used for one-time shrink/needle addition. When the number of disposable
shaker needles exceeds this parameter, the system automatically divides the
484
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

needles several times.


 Adding a needle: Specify the filling or edge-removing action of the first
single-sided knitting line after the automatic needle addition.
 Ignore: no hole filling;
 Weaving (filling holes): filling holes by weaving;
 Pick one half of the eye: fill the hole in a half-eye manner;
 Weaving (edge): Handling for the purpose of ensuring that the edges are
correct.

485
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Weaving the hole 2: Fill the hole with a four-translation needle.

 Needle shaker needle number: Used in conjunction with the 224-2 automatic
needle function line. When the number of shaker needles in the specified needle
row is greater than this setting, the needle movement is performed, otherwise
the needle movement is ignored.
 Lead warning: Set the number of stitches for the lead warning.
 When the number of stitches is 0, no warning is judged;
 There are two types of lead warnings. The first one is the number of needles
before weaving, and the second is the number of needles in the pure yarn
feeder.

 The warning of the number of stitches before weaving is valid for the
following two cases:

486
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The warning of the ultra-long needle number of the pure kicking yarn feeder
is more than the warning, regardless of whether weaving or weaving
direction.
 Local weaving ratio: The system automatically judges whether it is a local knitting
mark. The judgment result can be viewed in the “marker” window of “View cnt”,
which is further processed by the lower computer.
 V-neck automatic intarsia: As long as the number of v-neck safety stitches is
satisfied, the left and right pieces of the v-neck will automatically be weaved by
the intarsia method.

487
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Can automatically handle according to the number of v-collar safety stitches.


 The intarsia movement is equally effective for the two systems and the three
systems.
 Automatic standard collar: The execution is performed in 2*2 mode, but the
turning action on the 2nd line is executed uniformly.
 The left collar yarn feeder is on the left and the right collar yarn feeder is on
the right.
 The turning action is on even lines.

488
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Automatically brought into the yarn feeder (one line in advance): When the
same yarn feeder is brought out to the specified number of safety needles, if it is
used again, a knot-like action can be performed, and the yarn feeder is first
brought in one line.

489
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Bring in advance just to prevent the yarn feeder from being brought in from
the distal end without causing woven loops.
 If you can circle, you don't need to set options, you can save the number of
braided lines.
 Small page number automatic cycle: When the small picture is paged and
recycled in the pattern according to the page size, you can set this option, so you
can not set the page number of the small page number function line in the
pattern.
 The pattern line containing the small image in the pattern does not have to
be continuous.
 However, the small pages used must be continuous.

490
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Allow partial thumbnails: Support for using multiple thumbnails in a single line.
 The knotting degree follows the pattern line: the degree of the knotting action
does not use the number of segments set by the degree, but directly uses the
degree of the current pattern line.
 Automatic star position: Perform actions on the star as much as possible while
ensuring safety.It can be set to perform the action on the star position when
there is no more than the specified number of automatic star lines to avoid
frequent shaker movements.
 Toggle automatic connection: The following tick color codes support automatic
connection.
 Front hoisting, rear hoisting, front and rear hoisting;
 Before weaving, turn the needle to the back, then turn the needle to the
front;
 After weaving, turn the needle to the front and then turn the needle to the
back;
 The second section of the front sling, the second section of the rear sling,
the second section of the front and rear sling;
 (20, 30, 40, 50, 68, 69) Auto Connect: Specify these 6 color codes to perform
automatic connection.
 The automatic connection must be set when there is a need for a pin;
 Disable Tie 2: Interpret the Trick 2 action as a tuck action.
 Automated segmentation: When there is a multi-segment in a woven line in the
woven line, the automatic kneading yarn feeder realizes segmental weaving of
different degrees.

491
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Forced yarn feeder safety: During the weaving process, if there is a possibility of
collision with other yarn feeders, the yarn feeder will be automatically kicked
back to realize the segmentation process of the knitting process.
 Allow left line loop: Allows the left line to start the loop setting at the end of the
right line.
 There is no limit when the number of loops is 1.
 Wide yarn feeder alone to take out the number of stitches: In the case of knitting
with a wide yarn feeder, if the number of stitches of the main yarn feeder and
the wide yarn feeder are different, when the number of stitches is larger than
the current stitch number setting, the split tape Out.

492
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The wide yarn feeder can be a yarn feeder in the yarn feeder function line
when single-sided knitting.
 It can also be a yarn feeder defined in the yarn feeder set.
 As long as more than two or more yarn feeders are wide yarn feeders.
 The yarn feeder definition itself has no primary or secondary points, as long
as there are yarn feeders with the number of needles exceeding the
definition, they are taken out and taken out.
 Dangerous Needle Lines: In addition to the judgment of the dangerous needle
method (hanging needle condition) at the end of knitting, the program can warn
the needle in the middle of the pattern.
 If the number of rows is 0, no early warning is made.
 Any turning, falling, partial weaving, etc. count as the number of lines.
 Small graphs, etc. are counted as only one row, not calculated as the number
of rows after expansion.
 For the needle method of the alarm, it is necessary for the individual to
recombine himself to confirm whether there is a real risk of hanging the
needle.

493
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Yarn feeder weave form: Specify the knitting method of the yarn feeder in the
case of the following figure.

 Swing: the yarn feeder continues forward to the end of the next weaving
area, and then weaving back, the effect is as follows

 Continue: After the yarn feeder is finished, kick back and then continue to
weave the next weaving area. The effect is as follows

Note: The Continue Knitting command is not executed when the length of the
next weaving zone is less than the minimum value of the yarn feeder parking
point or the minimum number of stitches brought to the summer.
 Automatic edge clamping method: the processing method of the 200-color flat
color code.Single needle 1, double needle 1.

494
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Yarn feeder alignment: Set the minimum number of stitches for the yarn feeder
alignment (219-7). When the number of stitches is smaller than this, the
alignment of the yarn feeder position is not performed.Only valid for roller
machines.
 The yarn feeder is brought in before: Before the yarn feeder is used, it is turned
forward one by one, and the yarn feeder is brought from the outermost position
of the pattern to the knitting position.Only valid for roller machines.
 Number of safety needles at the yarn feeder parking point: generally refers to
the minimum and maximum safe parking point of the yarn feeder in the intarsia
area when inlaying or partial jacquard patterns.
 When there is a knitting, turning, and falling motion in the yarn feeder
parking point area, the yarn feeder is kicked back to avoid processing.
 It should be set according to the minimum maximum value of the actual
parking point on the machine.
 The yarn feeder avoidance process is not performed outside the parking
point range, so this option should be carefully and carefully filled out.

495
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Regarding the parking point, as shown in the above figure, the yarn feeder is
woven in the right row, and the parking point ranges from 5 and 10, so the
meaning is
 The default position of the yarn feeder is 5.6.7.8.9.10 in the second line. In
the range of these needles, if there is knitting, turning, falling, etc., then the
yarn feeder should be kicked back.
 If there is a needle in the range of 1.2.3.4 in the third line, you need to kick
back and avoid it.

496
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

13.3 NUMBER OF SAFETY NEEDS

 You can set the default yarn feeder, intarsia, and v-neck safety stitches for each
needle type.
 When the number of safety needles corresponding to the needle type is set, the
number of the safety needles is adopted;
 When the number of safety needles of the corresponding needle type is 0, the
default top unified safety needle number is adopted;
 Under normal circumstances, the safety number of the intarsia can be equal to
the number of v-neck safety needles;
 The number of safety points of the intarsia indicates the number of needles
required to lower the previous yarn feeder and then lift the next yarn feeder
when the system is knitting multiple yarn feeders in sections;

 Number of needles for yarn feeder: refers to the minimum distance between the

497
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

two yarn feeders on the same rail.The system will automatically bring the
conflicting yarn feeder to a position other than the number of stitches based on
the number of stitches.
 Requires a number of stitches greater than 3 inches.
 There is also a need to consider the factors of the yarn feeder parking point.
 Safety number of intarsias: the number of safety needles when intarsia (woven
form 81).When the ordinary yarn feeder performs the optimization of the
intarsia movement or the intarsia yarn feeder, the knitting motion is optimized
according to the number of stitches as much as possible.
 A number of stitches greater than 0.5 inches is required.
 The requirement is greater than the number of stitches at the yarn feeder
(default is 5 stitches).
 Number of safety stitches for V-neck: Number of safety stitches for V-necked
needles (woven form 91).When the left and right collars are smaller than the
number of safety stitches, the V-neck is automatically processed by 2x2.
 A number of stitches greater than 0.5 inches is required.
 The requirement is greater than the number of stitches at the yarn feeder
(default is 5 stitches).

498
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

13.4 JACQUARD OPTIONS

Used to set options related to jacquard.

 Tucking method, hanging distance, hanging space, and number of hanging


stitches: The method of automatically adding hanging when used for jacquard.
 When the hanging space is larger than the hanging distance, no lifting eyes
are added.
 The sling is added only when the jacquard back function line is empty or
custom.
 The rear weaving and the rear lifting action are handled in an automatic
499
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

setting.
 The number of pins is the number of consecutive stitches when adding a
tuck.
 Automatic drop-off of the eye-catching: When selecting front and rear hanging
or front and back weaving, it is recommended to set the hanging
automatically.In this way, the system will automatically perform the finishing
process after the specified interval of knitting.
 The number of falling intervals and the number of falling times are set in the
Intarsia option.
 In order to prevent the line from being too long, you can also choose the
way to turn the needle.

500
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Try speed optimization: Allows jacquard and weaving, turning needles, etc. to be
done in one action line in a safe situation, maximizing weaving efficiency.

 Try a new back: Create a new backing for the bag, bag + deer of sesame seeds to
avoid long dashes.At the same time, it supports the use of 1x1 days~1x5 days
under multi-color jacquard.

501
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Enable vertical bar: When the Scorpio is back, the back of the same yarn is on
the same needle.

502
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Try to hang the new position: Optimize the hanging position of the jacquard
empty needle, so that the hanging position is more regular.

 Back bed mode: When a yarn feeder in the jacquard does not have a needle
before and after the bed, the default is the weaving form of the back bed.

503
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Jacquard automatic connection: The front side of the jacquard area supports
automatic connection processing.
 Number of speed pulls for fixed Lycra: For the Lycra wire, use the same number
of speed pulls as the Lycra.
 Single-sided jacquard treatment: refers to the way the jacquard and single-sided
joints are treated.
 The existence of a four-flat organization is not the default.
 The presence of bird's eye tissue also has no default.

504
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Ignore: Single-sided jacquard must be handled manually.


 Automatic weaving: Two lines in advance are connected in a four-flat weave
to connect the jacquard.

 Automatic tucking/braiding: Connect the jacquard to the bottom in two


ways before hanging and weaving.

 Automatically pick the half: two lines in advance to pick up the jacquard in a
half-picked way.

505
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Inserting the rigging/braiding: The main color yarn feeder with the jacquard
is brought in front of the woven fabric in advance to connect the jacquard.

 Automatic weaving/tucking: Connect the jacquard to the bottom in two


ways before weaving and hanging.

 Back sling / weaving: Before the back stage, weaving and hanging the way to
connect the jacquard.This method is generally only used for the backstage in
the form of a scorpio.

 Automatic non-woven / tucking: The front bed is not woven and the bed is
suspended to connect the jacquard.
506
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Insert non-woven / tucking: Insert a twist before hanging and weaving to


connect the jacquard.

 Front hoisting and weaving: The bed is woven after the front bed is hung to
connect the jacquard at the bottom.

 Insert 1x1: Insert one turn before hanging and then weave to connect the
jacquard.

 Insert 1x1b: Insert the front sling in advance and insert it into the front to
connect the jacquard.

507
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The dense needle is four flat: the four flats are combined with the
independent density to make the bottom.

 The bird's eye is four flat: two rows of bird eyes are woven in four flats in
advance.

 Insert the gaze/weave 2: hang the cloth and add the front woven and woven
the bottom.

 Except for jacquard: For the woven form (21-71) of the entire line of jacquard,
this option can be set so that the bottoming process is not performed, and the
bottoming is required manually.

508
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Minimum number of needles for single-sided jacquard: When the partial


jacquard plus needle portion is smaller than the minimum number of stitches,
the bottoming of the single-sided jacquard is not performed.

 Jacquard single-sided processing: refers to the way the jacquard and single-sided
joints are treated.

 Ignore: Jacquards must be handled manually.


 Weaving form: Perform different actions in the jacquard for color codes with
forward and backward motion.
 Mode (1): The current yarn feeder performs a color code operation, and the
back yarn feeder performs a knitting operation.

 Mode (2): The current yarn feeder performs the front bed movement, and
the back yarn feeder performs the rear bed movement.

509
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Monochrome mode: A multi-color jacquard encounters a selection scheme that


is executed with only one color on a line.

 The yarn feeder is brought to the same way: for the yarn feeder in the jacquard,
whether it is divided into two sides of the pattern, it is woven in one direction.
 Enable local jacquard target segment: For the degree of weaving in the local
jacquard range, use the local jacquard in the function line to set the segment.
 Enable single-sided jacquard degree segment: For the partial weave range of
single-sided jacquard processing, use the “single-sided jacquard” degree in the
process sheet to set the number of segments.

 The ij color code automatically supports the reverse jacquard: when the jacquard
back is a jacquard of more than 100, the pattern of the ij color code is
automatically interpreted as a back weave.
 Automatic yarn feeder group: For the case where the yarn feeder group in the
knitting form is 0, the system will automatically generate a suitable yarn feeder
group.
 Yarn feeder order 1: Set the order of the yarn feeders in the yarn feeder
group from small to large, or from large to small;
510
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Yarn feeder order 2: Set the order of the yarn feeders in the yarn feeder
group to be sorted one by one, or odd or even odd, or even and odd;
 Single-sided priority: yarn feeders that are both single-sided and jacquard,
prioritized in the yarn feeder group.
 Generally used for multi-color jacquard (71), multi-color local jacquard (171)
and so on.
 Lycra is not supported.
 Wide yarn feeders are not supported.
 The automatic function in the yarn feeder group setting is generated
according to the following parameter settings.

 Hanging distance (bag), hanging space (bag), number of hanging lines (bag):
automatic lifting method for jacquard.
 When the hanging space is larger than the hanging distance, no lifting eyes
are added.
 The sling is added only when the jacquard back function line is a bag.
 The number of tick lines indicates that the tuck is added every few lines.
 Hanging color code: specify the color code of the hanging connection

511
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Hanging distance (Scorpio), hanging space (Scorpio), number of hanging lines


(Scorpio): Automatically add hanging method for jacquard.
 When the hanging space is larger than the hanging distance, no lifting eyes
are added.
 The sling will only be added when the jacquard backstage function line is a
scorpio.
 The number of tick lines indicates that the tuck is added every few lines.

 Enable empty needles: Automatically add rear slings when there are more empty
512
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

needles on the back.The hanging distance must be greater than the hanging
distance.

 Enable empty needle weaving: automatically add back weave when there are
more empty needles on the back.The hanging distance must be greater than the
hanging distance.The effect is the same as the above picture.

513
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

13.5 INTARSIA OPTION

Used to set options related to Intarsia.

 Connection method: connection processing between the yarn guides of each


intar.

 Empty needle: no connection action.


514
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Tuck (1), weave (1): Weaving immediately after hanging or weaving.


 Tuck (3), weave (3): The hang or the weave is connected with a needle and
then weaved.
 Weaving, turning the needle (1), weaving, turning the needle (3): the
reverse weaving is connected and then turned straight.
note:
 The float yarn feeder does not perform the connecting action;
 Simple machines can be connected by "weaving" or "weaving, turning".
 Connection position: When the color code of the connection position is the front
and rear movement, such as 3# color code, the action of setting the connection
mode is performed in the front bed or the back bed.
 Front: Weaving in front bed or hanging connection;
 After: weaving in the back bed or hanging connection;
 Automatic: the right line is connected in the back bed, and the left line is
connected in the front bed;
 Mandatory (front): forced to weave in front bed or tether connection;
 Mandatory (post): forced in the back bed weaving or hanging connection;

 Before and after: before and after the weaving live before and after the eye
connection;
 Connection sequence: the order of connection between the yarn ends of each
intar.
 Tuck, weave: first connect and weave.This setting is recommended.
 Weaving, hanging: first weave and connect.
 Connection method: yarn feeder connection between jacquard and intarsia.
515
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Secondary color: The connection is performed by the sub-color yarn feeder


of the jacquard yarn feeder group.The connection of all the sub-color yarn
feeders will be staggered by the connection position of one stitch.
 Edge color: Connect the yarn feeder at the edge of the jacquard.
 Main color: Connect according to the main color yarn feeder of the jacquard
yarn feeder group.
 Final secondary color: The connection is performed by the last pair of yarn
feeders of the jacquard yarn feeder group.
 The first sub-color: the connection is performed by the first sub-color yarn
feeder of the jacquard yarn feeder group.
 All colors: All jacquard yarn feeders perform the connection.
note:
 If the yarn feeder is connected to the left and right side of the yarn, the
connection is no longer performed.
 The primary color refers to the first yarn feeder of the effective yarn feeder
in the current yarn feeder group;
 The secondary color refers to all the remaining yarn feeders of the effective
yarn feeder in the current yarn feeder group except the primary color yarn
feeder;
 Bring in mode: the bringing in and out of each yarn feeder.

 Empty needle: Bring in and out with a kicking yarn.


 Tuck (x): The number of stitches specified by the interval is brought in by the
tuck.

516
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Weaving (x): Weaving is carried in by the specified number of stitches.

 Tipping: In addition to the minimum number of stitches set to the weaving


area, it is brought in a half-picked form.

 Turning the needle line: In addition to the minimum number of stitches set
to the knitting area, the needle is turned in and the needle is turned back.
 Number of needles for turning the needle: Control the distance from the
needle to the pressure line.

 Enable the second paragraph of the tuck: the action related to the lifting when
the belt is brought in is replaced by the second paragraph.
 Bring in the process: For the tucking method, it can be further set to the front
hanging back weaving or the front and rear hanging eyes.

517
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The post-weaving or post-hitting coil performs the finishing process after the
specified number of lines.

 The four flats are woven in the back bed.

 In the case of a weaving type such as 1x1, it is forcibly brought in the back
bed.

518
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 In the case of a weaving type such as 1x1, it is forcibly brought in the front
bed.

 Under the four-flat weaving line, it is forced to be brought in a four-flat


manner.

519
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Single-line mode: The way the last line is processed in an irregular intarsia
pattern.
 None: It adopts the normal belt-in and take-out method to support the front
hanging and weaving and automatic falling.

 Tie 2: Handled by the direct weaving of the tuck 2 .

 1 compartment 1: It is treated by one-by-one weaving.

 Tucking 2, 1 compartment 1: According to the situation, the method is to


use the method of weaving 2 and 1 every 1 knitting. Generally, this option
can be set.

520
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Weaving: Similar to the 1st and 1st filling method, the knitting motion of the
next line is used directly to make up.

 Support single-sided: For the single-sided non-introduction summer weaving line,


it can be done in a similar way such as 1x1.

 The length of the single-line weave must exceed the number of yarn feeders
to follow.
521
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Except for single needle: Set whether to handle in one-line mode in case of
needle-filling for one needle.Except for the setting, it is executed by the yarn
feeder.
 Single line mode range: Single line mode is executed only within the set number
of stitches.
 The number of falling cloths and the number of falling cloths: For the belts
brought in before and after weaving, the cloth falling parameters can be set so
that the back weaving stitches are disposed after the specified knitting line.

 This setting is also used on the automatic hanging drop of the jacquard
empty needle.
 No back weaving coils will not fall.
 It has been covered by the normal braided coil and will not fall.
 Bring in the minimum number of stitches: When inside the intarsia, because the
edge of the pattern is irregular, it is necessary to bring in the automatic kicking
yarn feeder. The automatic kicking yarn is smaller than the number of stitches;
otherwise, it is brought in by the intarsia. deal with.

 When set to 3, it is necessary to weave the yarn feeder before hanging.

522
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 When set to 15, the yarn feeder is kicked directly.In practical applications,
the minimum number of stitches should not be too large.

 Yarn feeder line number: When the yarn feeder is not used within the specified
number of knitting lines, it does not need to be taken out of the knitting area,
but stays in the knitting area.

 Number of needle holders: When the yarn feeder needs to be taken out to the
starting edge of the next knitting area due to the number of lines remaining, if
523
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

the number of stitches from the edge of the pattern is within the number of
stitches, the yarn feeder is automatically brought out to the edge of the pattern.

As shown above, the 4# yarn feeder needs to be brought out to the left edge of
the next 4# weaving area by the red arrow, because there is only the number of
stitches at the yellow arrow at the edge of the pattern.
 When the number of stitches is less than the number of stitches in the
yellow area, the yarn feeder stays at the red arrow;
 When the number of stitches is greater than the number of stitches in the
yellow area, the yarn feeder is brought out to the yellow arrow;
 Enable the jacquard back: When the yarn feeder is brought in and out, it is
woven in the jacquard area with the jacquard back

 In-segment weaving: When the yarn feeder is brought in and out, it is woven
separately from the normal weaving area.
 By default, the degree of bringing in and out is 21 segments;
 The yarn feeder parking point that is brought into the take-out portion by
default is the first group.

524
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Jacquard segment weaving: Weaving one-sided and partial jacquard weaving


sections in sections.
 The degree of the local jacquard is set in the l207 function line.

 Try speed optimization: For intarsia patterns, try speed optimization.


 Supports the same yarn feeders in the first and third rows, but the speed is
optimized when the yarn feeder is different from the second yarn feeder.
 Supports speed optimization in the case of multiple pieces of weaving.
 Supports two colors of left and right, and the speed optimization of the yarn
feeder in the opposite direction.

525
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Supports the start line, the end line 2 colors, and the speed optimization in
the middle 3 colors.

 Allowing to kick the double yarn feeder: Optimize the yarn feeder movement by
kicking the two yarn feeders at one time, thereby reducing the number of
movements, thereby improving the knitting efficiency.It can support up to 3 yarn
feeders at the same time.

 Automatic diamond block intarsia: For the intarsia of the diamond block, the
optimized switch provided to avoid continuous hanging on the same needle, so
that the two eye movements are staggered by one stitch.

526
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Only valid for the "tuck (1)" connection method.


 Enable two-line optimization: In the case of speed optimization, optimize the
knitting performance with two behaviors to achieve the optimal knitting
efficiency. However, the single-sided connection at this time may not meet the
customer's requirements. Please choose carefully. set.
 There should be no floating yarn feeders in the optimized pattern.
 The number of needles in the knitting area of ​ ​ each yarn feeder in the
pattern must be above the safety number of the intarsia.
 The four intarsia patterns of the following yarn feeders are not optimized.
 The more yarn feeders are used, the more efficient the optimization.
 The system automatically adopts different optimization strategies according
to the pattern, so as to achieve the best optimization effect.
 This strategy is generally recommended only for vertical strip patterns.
 Due to the different optimization rules, the appearance of different
boundary junctions is slightly different.

527
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Enable both sides of the optimization: In the case of speed optimization, when
there are more than two yarn feeders, the initial position of the yarn feeder is
left and right, and the knitting blocks of each yarn feeder are irregular. You can
set this option to match the yarn feeder. The "number" option minimizes the
handling of the yarn feeder.

 Optimize 81-3 action: Set whether the 81-3 intarsia action is allowed in the
generated machine action file. If there are 81-3 actions, the number of running
lines can be optimized. Some early electronic controls are not supported, or not
good. Tuning, you can turn off this option.

528
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Intarsia yarn feeder speed optimization: For the intarsia yarn feeder, the knitting
effect is achieved with the minimum number of knitting rows, but the back joint
does not necessarily meet the customer's requirements.

 Floating yarn feeder single needle first: After setting the float yarn feeder option,
the float yarn feeder is preferentially woven in the intarsia weave.
Default mode

529
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Floating yarn feeder first mode

530
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

13.6 SLICE EXPANSION OPTIONS

Used to set the parameters for the expansion of the floor pattern.

The slice expansion option will only appear for patterns that meet the following four
criteria:
 Must be the bottom plate pattern;
 Only use the left yarn feeder;
 Can not have yarn setting;
 The automatic yarn exit is selected at the end of the yarn exit.
 Distance between sheets: Make sure that the yarn feeder does not collide at this
spacing.
 The intarsia yarn feeder has a larger spacing than the ordinary yarn feeder.
 Inter-chip processing: choose different treatment methods between the two
pieces of rubber yarn and the bottom waste yarn.
 Choose the appropriate treatment according to the actual situation.

531
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

532
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Yarn feeder correspondence: Select the yarn feeder with the same part on two
pieces.
 Try not to use the same yarn feeder as much as possible, because a larger
inter-chip distance is required.

533
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

14. Image processing

14.1 FUNCTION ENTRY

In the drawing area, click the right mouse button menu, find the "image
processing" function, or click the shortcut icon to open the image
processing function.

14.2 OPEN

In the image processing interface, click on the file (Open, then find
the image you want to process in the dialog box, then click Open.

534
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

You can see that the "3.bmp" image is open, see Figure 4 below.Here
we can zoom in and out on the view, the shortcut key F11 on the keyboard
can be reduced, F12 can be enlarged.In fact, you can also use the "View"
menu to zoom.The newly opened pattern is displayed in the full window at
the most reasonable scale. Press F10 to return to the size of the 1:1
original image.

14.3 ZOOM

535
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Scale the image to the specified size with the shortcut key
"ctrl+a".
 Size setting: Select “Picture (Zoom) function, set the new size
in the zoom window, the image size (that is, the original image size)
will be automatically loaded, the new size needs to be set by itself,
the width 104 indicates the number of stitches. The height 98
indicates the number of lines, and the point is determined after
setting the new size.

 Setting a new size can also be done automatically using fabric size
and density.The value in the fabric size item is in centimeters,
the width value 13 indicates the width of the cloth, the length value
10 indicates the height of the cloth; the value in the density item
is in the needle/cm, and the horizontal density value 10 indicates
10 needle/cm. The secret value 10 indicates 10 lines/cm. After
setting, the point calculation will automatically calculate the new
size.

536
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

New size width = fabric size width x horizontal density


New size height = fabric size length x vertical density
Note: The use of fabric size and density to calculate new dimensions,
the first condition is that we have to be very clear about the actual
transverse and longitudinal density of the fabric, as well as the width
and length of the fabric that needs to be made, otherwise it is difficult
to reach the standard size at one time.

14.4 RESAMPLING

Resampling allows you to keep the original size scaled. See the
“Keep original aspect ratio” in the red box below and tick it.

14.5 GRAYSCALE PROCESSING

14.5.1 Grayscale

537
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Click on the menu "Color (Grayscale), you can directly convert the
picture to 256 colors, the default gray level algorithm is the
conventional standard algorithm. The shortcut key is "ctrl+g".

14.5.2 Automatic Binary


Click on the menu "Color (Auto Binary), you can directly convert
538
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

the picture into a 2-color black and white pattern. The shortcut key
is "ctrl+h".

14.5.3 Custom Grayscale


Click on the menu "Color (Grayscale (2 colors), you can directly
convert the picture into a 256-color pattern with only 2 color codes.
The shortcut key is "ctrl+2". Other colors are similar.
Taking three colors as an example, press “ctrl+3” to enter the
3-color grayscale processing, and the system directly adjusts the color
to the corresponding color code of the three-color constant-power
system.
 You can adjust the area range of the 3 color code by dragging
the fine adjustment button; at the same time, you can see the
real-time adjustment effect during the fine adjustment
process;
 You can also drag the spin button with the mouse wheel;
 You can change the list of color numbers to handle grayscale
processing of other color numbers;
539
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 After the effect is satisfactory, click the “OK” button to


realize the custom grayscale processing;
 Click the "Close" button to cancel the grayscale processing.

14.5.4 Reduce the number of colors


Click the menu "Color (reduced color)" to achieve the purpose of
reducing the color of the picture.

540
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 In the case of optimization, the number of colors retained after


the transformation can be limited;
 In the case of reduction to 16 colors and 256 colors, the number
of colors retained after the conversion can be limited;

14.6 PADDING

The area fills the specified color or color number.


 The fill color is divided into 256 colors and rgb color modes;
 When the picture is 256 colors, it is filled according to the
fill color number directly input;
 When the picture is rgb true color, you can set the color to
be filled to fill;

541
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

14.7 ROTATION

Click the menu "Rotate (Rotate) to rotate the picture to the


specified angle. This function is used to process the tilted picture.
The shortcut key is "ctrl+t".
 A positive angle indicates a clockwise rotation;
 A negative angle indicates a rotation in a counterclockwise
direction;
 Keeping the original size will lose some content and use it with
caution.

542
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 In view of the poor rotation angle setting, the line function can
be matched, and the angle is automatically calculated by the
system;
 Click on the menu "View (Tools (Line)", you can draw a line on
the picture as a horizontal reference line;
 Draw two reference points on the picture with the mouse as the
two ends of the line to draw a reference line;
 Entering the rotation function will automatically calculate
the angle of rotation. After rotating according to this angle,
the picture will be placed horizontally according to this line;

543
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

14.8 CROP

Click on the menu "Picture (Trimming), you can crop the picture
at the specified location. The shortcut key is "ctrl+j". This function
must be completed with the selection area.
 Click on the menu "View (Tools (Rectangle Selection Area)" to
set the area to be cropped on the picture;
 First draw the selection area by long pressing the left mouse
button;
 Secondly, the size of the selection area can be fine-tuned by
selecting the four vertices of the area and the center points
of the four sides;

544
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 Press “ctrl+j” to perform the cropping function, and the


reserved area can be cut off;

545
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

14.9 SELECTION AREA

You can also crop the image by irregularly selecting the area.
 Click on the menu "View (Tools (Selection Area)" to set the area
to be cropped on the picture;
 You can long press the left mouse button to move the mouse to
sketch the edge of the selection area;
 The vertices of the selection area can be set by clicking the
left mouse button;
 Multiple segment edge lines and multiple vertices can be set;
 Click the right mouse button to complete the setting of the
irregular selection area.

14.10 RECTANGULAR SELECTION AREA

You need to set the rectangle selection area before cropping.


 Automatically generate a maximum range of rectangular
selection areas;
 You can change the range of the selection area by dragging 8
endpoints;

546
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

14.11 STRAIGHT LINE

The line applies the rotation angle calculation and the breakpoint
depiction of the line.
 First click the left mouse button to draw the first endpoint
of the line;
 Then click the left mouse button to draw the second endpoint
of the line, then the system will automatically pop up the
rotation window and automatically calculate the rotation angle,
you can enter the rotation process.
 When you draw the second endpoint of a line by clicking the right
mouse button, a black line segment is automatically inserted,
which can be used for extension of the line segment, connection
of breakpoints, and so on.

547
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

14.12 FILTERING

Divided into linear and nonlinear processing.


Linear execution filtering allows for micro-motion of images such
as blurring, sharpening, softening, and red-eye removal.
The nonlinear execution function can perform etching, expansion,
and the like on the image.

548
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

14.13 INTEGRATION

Click on the menu "Color (Integration) to integrate the picture


colors into the specified colors.

 Use the mouse click directly in the image to get the color
retained after integration;
 You can cancel the reserved color by clicking the specified
color in the integration window.

549
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

550
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

14.14 SHORTCUT KEYS

Click on the menu "Help" to see the system's shortcut definitions.

14.15 CUSTOMIZATION

Click the menu "Help (Customize) to set the menu of frequently used
functions.

Tick ​ ​ the common menu. After confirming, the corresponding


buttons of these menus will appear on the right side of the main window
image area, you can click directly to enter.

551
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

14.16 EXIT

Once the image processing has finished exiting, you can use the
paste function to paste the new image that was last processed.

552
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

15. Variable degree target drawing method and


precautions

15.1 DYNAMIC DEGREE

Hengqiang's latest electronic control system can support the same line pattern
and set different density. For example, the same line pattern contains four flat and
single-sided flat needles. In this case, the two parts can be set to different densities,
for example, the density value of the four flats. 300, single-sided flat needle density
is 360, but note that each time a unit density changes, the machine head will run a
small distance to reach, that is, from 300 to 360 need to go through a few stitches,
the slower the speed, the required changes The fewer the number of stitches.

Density change a: density 1 minus density 2 (density difference between the two
regions)
The number of transition needles b: a / (150 / stitch).a is the density change
value, 150 represents the maximum value per inch change, and the stitch length
represents the number of stitches per inch.

For example, on a machine with a stitch length of 12, it is desirable to change the
coil density from 300 to 360, as shown in the figure:

553
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Calculation results:
A:360-300=60
B:60/(150/12)=4.8

Therefore, from 300 to 360, we need to transfer about 4.8 stitches. We can set 5
needles and 99 colors in the change area when we are drawing.

15.2 DRAWING METHOD

After drawing the pattern, copy it to the degree chart for variability editing.
First select the area to be used for the variable purpose, then right click and
select Copy to the degree map.Then draw the corresponding color according to the
number of segments of the degree.
The actual drawing effect is as follows

554
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

15.3 PRECAUTIONS

 If the degree image is only partially colored, the degree of the other areas is
implemented according to the number of segments of the function line.
 The change area between the two degrees is defaulted according to the
lower position machine. Generally, the 3-needle machine is configured for 2
inches, and the 12-pin machine is 1 inch. If the 3-pin machine is used, the
range of variation is 6 pins, the area is connected, and each area is 3 needles,
called the principle.Circle the part as shown in Figure 1.

figure 1

 If you need to manually control the variability range, it will be represented


555
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

by the 99th color between the two areas, and 99 directly defines the range
of the change area, which is not affected by the configuration of the lower
computer.Figure 2

figure 2

 If a certain area does not need to change, but the range of the two sides
connected to the area needs to be changed, the area is represented by the
color number of the 100+ degree segment.If defined as paragraph 9, draw
the 109th color.The range of change of the adjacent area is also
automatically calculated according to the lower computer program.Drawing
effect is shown in Figure 3.

556
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

image 3

15.4 EXAMPLE OF TWISTING

Copy the pattern first to the degree chart

557
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Then draw the area that needs to be relaxed with different degrees of values.

558
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Based on the varying values, draw 99 to determine the area that needs to
change.For example, a 3-needle machine, the color area of ​ ​ the 9th figure above
is relaxed at 90 degrees, then 2 needles are needed for the transition.Then draw 2
stitches of 99 colors on the edges.To relax the 40-degree target in the 10th color area,
only 1 stitch is required.Draw a picture according to this rule.Otherwise, the
transition area recognized by the lower computer is the default one inch or 3 stitches,
and the effect is not as good as drawing the 99 color.After painting, remove the other
colors of the eyepiece.Because the color in this picture represents the degree! Do
not remove other colors, the other colors are different degrees.This is wrong!

Some details are as follows

559
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Then compile, compile and view the workspace

If there is a range of the following in the table, the variability is made correctly.

560
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

15.5 SIDE NEEDLE RELAXATION (TIGHTENING ) PRACTICE

Copy the pattern of the area that needs to be made into the variable degree to
the degree chart

561
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

We use three ways to do the variability.


 The first type: directly in the degree map to draw a different degree area
with a separate number of segments

 Second: Calculate the number of stitches according to the range of changes


required, and use the 99th color to draw the variable range.

562
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 The third type: direct area color +100 way to indicate a fixed area (the area
does not participate in the excessive range), the lower computer program
will automatically calculate the excessive range according to the varying
degree difference, and the excessive range is in the 8th area.

The above three methods can be implemented, according to personal habits.

15.6 CALCULATION FOCUS

 The current variability is 150 degrees per inch at a speed of 0.7 m/s.For
example, if a 3-needle machine is to be changed to a 300-degree target, a
6-pin (2 inch) change area (ie, No. 99 color) needs to be drawn on the plate.
563
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 If the 12-pin machine needs to change the value of 50, it will require 4 pins
(1/3 inch).
 This kind of push to do the range of changes.
 For mechanical and other reasons, in order to ensure that the degree can be
changed in place, when manually calculating the change zone No. 99, set as
many as possible of the 2-pin change range.
 If the No. 99 change zone is not used on the plate making, the transition
range is automatically calculated by the lower computer.
 It is recommended to use the 100+ color code method, and the lower
computer automatically calculates the transition interval.
 All systems in the same line support up to 32 variable areas.

15.7 COMPILATION OPTIONS - SCOPE

Indicates that the area that is larger than this range is processed to perform the
variability.For more complex variable intervals, the size of the change region can be
calculated according to the degree of change required.A region smaller than the
range does not perform the variability.It is generally recommended to set more
than 2 pins.

564
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

565
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

16. Beginners use

16.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

When the user gets the CD of the software, please run the installation program
SETUP.EXE in the CD environment, which is self-extracting.For optional installation of
the encryption lock version, or serial number version.
Encryption lock version installation method: After installing setup.exe, you need
to install a decryption dog driver, and then insert the encryption lock on the usb
interface to run.
Serial number version installation method: After installing setup.exe, run "Start -
All Programs - Hengqiang New Generation Platemaking System - Database
Engine".Then double-click on the desktop icon to get the serial number.
The operation process is as follows
Double-click the setup.exe program to enter the installation.

Select the installer language (Chinese, English)

566
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

License Agreement Terms (optional)

For information filling

Path selection: It is recommended to install in the default directory of the c


drive.

567
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The installation is complete

After the installation is complete, you need to install the database engine in the
program.as follows

Choose to accept the License Agreement

568
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Click Next to install.

Note: Users who have installed the old version, it is recommended to delete the
old version before installing the new program, you can use the installer to delete, as
follows

successfully deleted

569
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

16.2 FIRST TIME USE

After running the horizontal mechanism software in the start menu program or
double-clicking the desktop icon, the system enters the main screen of the system.
Click the drop-down menu file - New, or just click the shortcut New button and
the dialog will pop up.Select the machine type and attachment function.

Click Next. A dialog box will appear, allowing you to select the appropriate plot

570
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

size (number of stitches * number of rows).The size of the drawing area can be as
large as the designed pattern, or it can be larger than the pattern (it is recommended
to choose a large size for other operations). If you choose Custom (select other), the
height (row number) and width (number of stitches) Must be greater than or equal
to 32, otherwise an error warning will be prompted.
The design pattern is required to start from the lower left corner (1:1).The
system automatically recognizes the width (number of stitches) of the pattern, and
the pattern must have an end line mark, that is, an end mark is added at the
corresponding position in the function line drawing area.

Picasso or other image opening method


Newly created drawing board, it is recommended to create a new 2048*2048
drawing board, because larger ones can guarantee you to import the picture
completely, otherwise the picture may be lost.
Then select the file - import, the import format is *.bmp, as long as the bmp type
file can be imported, and Picasso's image import is to import the function line
together.
As shown below

571
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Faster way to open:

572
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

 When opening, select the file type as "bmp".


 The system will adaptively create patterns based on the bmp file and
automatically load other related files such as opt.
 When you open a bmp file, the system automatically creates a pds pattern file
with the same name.

16.3 DRAWING

Drawing operation

It is recommended to press the f12 function key to draw the image to the
appropriate size (maximum magnification ratio is 20:1). It is easy to draw after the
grid line screen appears.
First understand what kind of flower version you want to make, to determine
what to do next?
Jacquard, single, double-sided basic patterns, v-neck, intarsia (weaving, hanging,
turning).
At this point, the drawing area that appears in front of you is what you need. You
can select the drawing tools in the toolbar or menu, such as pencils, line drawing,
circle drawing, etc. Of course, you can also choose to circle, copy, and expand. And
other auxiliary operations.
Jacquard color map, v-neck yarn feeder, and intarsia yarn feeder.
Intarsia and jacquard tissue maps can be switched to view for painting, or you
573
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

can use the shortcut copy key to copy after drawing in the pattern.
Note: When drawing a jacquard pattern, the pattern image is covered with the 1st
color, and the intarsia chart can be designed using the 1-8 color.Its meaning provides
yarn feeder information.

Quick modification of the drawing area

In the drawing area, you can quickly modify some settings, right-click anywhere
in the drawing area to pop up the quick modification window, and select the desired
modification option.

Auxiliary information setting

In the corresponding position of the function line drawing area, set control
information such as economy, degree, shaker, speed, roll cloth, weaving form, yarn
feeder (1), end mark, etc., complete the preparation of the whole process.

16.4 YARN FEEDER SETTING

Yarn feeder initial weaving position

Select the drop-down menu: Click on the flat knitting machine - yarn feeder
starting position setting, enter the dialog box.Set whether the yarn feeder is available,
the yarn feeder is initially left, and the right side is parked.
16 yarn feeders can be used at the same time, and the yarn feeder is defined as
follows.

574
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Basic yarn feeder setting

At the position corresponding to the basic organization of the functional line


drawing area, the yarn feeder (1), the yarn feeder (2), the yarn feeder (3), the yarn
feeder (4), and the like are designated according to the model of the knitting
system.When the left mouse button clicks on the 15th yarn feeder (1) of the indicator
bar window, the second drawing area simultaneously displays the function line l of
the yarn feeder (1).

Basic page double yarn feeder (wide yarn feeder)

When the basic organization sets the knitting yarn feeders of the system-1,
system-2, etc. of the yarn feeder (2) on the yarn feeder (1) setting line on the
function line 1, it means that one of the knitting systems is simultaneously provided.
The two yarn feeders are engaged in weaving, and the second yarn feeder is a wide
yarn feeder for weaving the yarn-bonding structure (high-elastic yarn, spandex yarn,
etc.).
Note: Timing organization
Some or all of the coils are formed by two or more different yarns. The two yarns

575
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

are regular in the coil, one is always on the surface of the coil called the veil, and the
other is always inside the coil. Yarn, which makes the front and back of the fabric
form two different color coils to achieve different color effects.Jacquard flat knitting
machines generally use the same knitting system with two yarn feeders at the same
time (one of which is a wide yarn feeder), and the other method uses a special yarn
feeder (the two yarns are inserted into one yarn feeder at the same time) In the
gauze hole, the middle small hole is a veil, and the auxiliary hole is a bottom yarn).

Jacquard yarn feeder group

After specifying the jacquard weaving form in the second drawing area (function
line l), the yarn feeder group definition must be specified at the same time. At least
one set of definitions must be defined. According to the pattern, multiple sets of yarn
feeder group definitions can be set to meet the process requirements (click on the
yarn feeder). The “+” button at the top of the group setting window allows you to set
multiple groups).

Use only in jacquard tissue of 2 or more colors.

16.5 SAVE THE BOARD FILE


Select the drop-down menu: Left click on the file - Save (S) or Save As (A) to
enter the save dialog.Select the file type (the default is PDS format), type the file
name you want to save. After entering the system for the first time, please select
Save As (A), otherwise click Save to save according to the system default name
HqPDS1.

16.6 AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING (AUTOMATIC TAPEOUT )

Select the drop-down menu for the flat knitting machine - automatically
generate the action file, and a running box with the compiled progress bar will pop
up. If nothing happens, the hcd file required for the flat knitting machine will be
generated.Otherwise, an error message will be reported.

576
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

16.7 SPLIT VIEW VIEW

This step is not required, but it is recommended that you use it to view the effect
of the split, so as to verify whether the auxiliary information of the drawing or
function line in the drawing area is accurate from the other side. The design has the
same effect.
Click View - Toolbar - Workspace to open the workspace to import the cnt map,
and automatically bring in the pat split graph.And cnt and pat map have a connection
definition, pat line and cnt flower version line lock, double click can switch.

16.8 EXAMPLE OF SPLIT GRAPH

Flower name: 8*8 lattice jacquard


Jacquard type: two colors
Knitted pattern: bag shape
Jacquard code: 21.6.1

577
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Basic pattern

Pat diagram:

Jacquard organization:

578
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Jacquard organization representation in the split graph


No. 0 color block empty needle.
The No. 1 color block is woven by the main bed and the front face.
The 2nd color block is main and the bed is woven after the face color.

Weaving code 21.6.1 Air layer (bag)

For two-color jacquard, a row of jacquard weaving splits is displayed as two lines of
main color, and two lines are colored.
The first line of the split picture: the front face color weave (No. 1 color block).
The second line of the split picture: the main face color is woven (No. 2 color block).
The third line of the split chart: before the face color weave (also with the number 1
color block).
The third line of the split chart: Weave after the face color (also using the No. 1 color
block).
According to the different weaving forms of the back bed weaving, the display results
are different.
The basic split of the 3-6 color jacquard is the same as the two-color jacquard, except
that the number of split lines per woven line is more (the general calculation formula
is: jacquard color number * 2).

579
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

17. Part of the needle diagram

17.1 SINGLE-SIDED POSITIVE NEEDLE (FRONT BED )

Playing the needle diagram

Weaving code: 8...

580
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

17.2 SINGLE-SIDED REVERSE NEEDLE (BACK BED )

Playing the needle diagram

Weaving code 9...

581
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

17.3 SIPING WEAVING (TOTAL NEEDLE)

Playing the needle diagram

Weaving code 10...

582
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

17.4 1X1 RIBBING

Playing the needle diagram

Weaving code 8.9...

583
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

17.5 2X1 RIB (2X1 PIT )

Playing the needle diagram

Weaving code 8.10.9...

584
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

17.6 2X2 RIB (2X2 PIT )

Playing the needle diagram

Weaving code 8.8.9.9......

585
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

17.7 PICKING HOLES (MESH / LENO TISSUE)

17.8 TWISTED FLOWER (TWISTED ROPE )

586
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

17.9 DOUBLE INGOT (WICKER )

17.10 JACQUARD (SINGLE-SIDED JACQUARD / SINGLE -SIDED PULL

LINE )

587
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

588
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

17.11 INTARSIA

589
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

18. Color block table


Color Color Weaving instructions
block
0
Non-woven (empty needle)
1
Front bed weaving (with turning action)
2
Back bed weaving (with turning action)
3 Front and back bed weaving (total needle weaving) (four flat
weave)
4
Front tuck
5
Rear eye
6
Front weaving, rear hanging
7
After weaving, front tuck
8
Front weave, no connection
9
After weaving, no connection
10
Weaving before and after, no connection (four flat weave)
11
Front bed weaving
12
Back bed weaving
13
Front and back bed weaving two segments (four flat weave)
14
Front and rear
15
Front drop
16
No needle
17
After falling
18 Lower cable bone (1) [Changing 29 (priority) fit.Turn the needle
backwards, not woven]

590
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

19 Lower cable bone (2) [Changing 49 (prioritized turning) fit.Turn


the needle backwards, not woven]
20
Front weaving, turning the needle back

21
Front weave + left turn 1 stitch
22
Front weave + left turn 2 stitches
23
Front weave + left turn 3 stitches
24
Front weave + left turn 4 stitches
25
Front weave + left turn 5 stitches
26
Front weave + left turn 6 stitches
27
Front weave + left turn 7 stitches
28 Front weave, lower cable bone (1)
[Weaving the front bed, turning it backwards, then shaking the
needle 1 needle, 2 needles, 3 needles...
29 Front weave, upper cable bone (1)
[Weaving the front bed first, turning it backwards, then shaking
the left needle 1 stitch, 2 stitches, 3 stitches... before turning
over]
30
Front weaving, turning the needle to the front
31
Front weave + right turn 1 stitch
32
Front weave + right turn 2 stitches
33
Front weave + right turn 3 stitches
34
Front weave + right turn 4 stitches
35
Front weave + right turn 5 stitches
36
Front weave + right turn 6 stitches
37
Front weave + right turn 7 stitch
38 After weaving, lower bones (1)
[38, 39 used together, 38 first turned back, woven back bed, 39
no weaving, after weaving, 39 turned back, 39 left turned
591
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

forward (left shake a few needles depending on the twisted


flower), 38 right turn before】
39
Upper bone (1)

40
After weaving, turning the needle to the front
41
After weaving + left turn 1 stitch
42
After weaving + left turn 2 stitches
43
After weaving + left turn 3 stitches
44
After weaving + left turn 4 stitches
45
After weaving + left turn 5 stitches
46
After weaving + left turn 6 stitches
47
After weaving + left turn 7 stitches
48
Front weave, lower cable bone (2)
49
Front weave, upper cable bone (2)
50
After weaving, turning the needle back
51
After weaving + right turn 1 stitch

52
After weaving + right turn 2 stitches
53
After weaving + right turn 3 stitches
54
After weaving + right turn 4 stitches
55
After weaving + right turn 5 stitches
56
After weaving + right turn 6 stitches
57
After weaving + right turn 7 stitches
58
After weaving, lower bones (2)
59
Upper bone (2)
592
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

60 Weaving before, turning the needle to the back, and turning the
needle to the front
61 Front weaving, turn the needle to the back, shift the needle to
the left and turn the needle to the front
62 Front weaving, turn the needle to the back, move the needle 2
digits to the left
63 Front weaving, turn the needle to the rear, shift the needle 3
digits to the left
64 Front weaving, turn the needle to the rear, shift the needle 4
turns to the left
65 Before weaving, turn the needle to the rear, and move the
needle 5 turns to the left.
66 Front weaving, turn the needle to the rear, shift the needle 6
turns to the left
67 Before weaving, turn the needle to the rear, and move the
needle 7 turns to the left.
68
Weaving before and after, and turning the needle back
69
Weaving before and after, and turning the needle to the front
70
Turn the needle to the front and weave the front
71 Before weaving, turn the needle to the rear, and move the
needle to the right to turn the needle to the front.
72 Before weaving, turn the needle to the rear, and move the
needle 2 to the right to the front.
73 Before weaving, turn the needle to the back, and move the
needle 3 digits to the right.
74 Before weaving, turn the needle to the rear, and shift the
needle 4 turns to the right.
75 Before weaving, turn the needle to the rear, and shift the
needle 5 points to the right.
76 Before weaving, turn the needle to the rear, and shift the
needle 6 to the right.
77 Before weaving, turn the needle to the rear, and move the
needle 7 times to the right.
78
Turn the needle to the back and weave it back and forth
79
Turn the needle to the front and weave it back and forth
80 After weaving, turn the needle to the front and turn the needle
to the back
81 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, shift the needle to
the left and turn the needle to the left.
593
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

82 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and move the
needle 2 turns to the left.
83 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and shift the needle
to the left by 3 stitches.
84 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and shift the needle
4 turns to the left.
85 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, shift the needle to
the left and turn the needle to the left.
86 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and shift the needle
6 turns to the left.
87 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and move the
needle 7 turns to the left.
88 Front weaving, right shift 1 stitch and then turn the needle to
the front
89 Front weaving, right shift 2 needles and then turn the needles
to the front
90
Turn the needle to the back and then weave
91 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and move the
needle to the right to turn the needle to the back.
92 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and shift the needle
2 to the right.
93 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and shift the needle
3 points to the right.
94 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and shift the needle
4 turns to the right.
95 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and shift the needle
5 points to the right.
96 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and shift the needle
6 turns to the right.
97 After weaving, turn the needle to the front, and shift the needle
to the right by 7 stitches.
98 Front weaving, shifting the needle 3 points to the right and then
turning the needle to the front position
99 Front weaving, shifting the needle 4 turns to the right and then
turning the needle to the front
100
Turn the needle to the rear, no weaving
101 Front weaving, shifting the needle 1 turn to the left and then
turning the needle to the front after t position
102 Front weaving, shifting the needle 2 turns to the left and then
turning the needle to the front
103 Front weaving, shifting the needle 3 turns to the left and then
turning the needle to the front
594
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

104 Front weaving, shifting the needle 4 turns to the left and then
turning the needle to the front
105 After weaving, shift 1 needle to the right and then turn the
needle to the front and then turn the needle to the front.
106 After weaving, shift 2 needles to the right and then turn the
needles to the front and then turn the needles to the rear.
107 After weaving, shift the needle 3 points to the right and then
turn the needle to the front position.
108 After weaving, shift 4 needles to the right and then turn the
needles to the front and then turn the needles to the rear.
109 After weaving, shift 1 needle to the left and then turn the
needle to the front.
110
Turn the needle to the front (no weaving)
111
Front bed weaving picking
112
Back bed weaving
113 After weaving, shifting the needle 2 turns to the left and then
turning the needle after the t position
114 After weaving, move the needle 3 turns to the left and then
turn the needle to the front and then turn the needle to the
rear.
115 After weaving, shift the needle 4 turns to the left and then turn
the needle to the front and then turn the needle to the rear.
116
Front bed weave pick half eye + left shift 1 stitch
117
Front bed weave pick half eye + right shift 1 stitch
118
Back bed weaving pick half eye + left shift 1 stitch
119
Back bed weaving pick half eye + right shift 1 stitch

120
~ User macro, small picture module color code (120-183)
183
131

After weaving intarsia color code + yarn feeder number
146

151
~ Front weave intarsia color + yarn feeder number
166
595
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

167

Front weave jacquard color code + yarn feeder number
182

184
Pre-weaving wig
185
Post-weaving front wig
186
Pre-tipping wig
187
Rear sling
188
Front needle
189
Post needle
190
Front and rear needle
191
Front bed weaving + 1 turn left and right
192
Front bed weave + front left and right 2 stitches
193
Front bed weaving + left and right left 3 stitches
194
Front bed weave + front left and right 4 stitches
195
Front bed weave + right and left turn 1 stitch
196
Front bed weaving + right and left 2 stitches
197
Front bed weave + right and left turn 3 stitches
198
Front bed weave + right and left turn 4 stitches
199 Color code for automatic connection of front and rear beds as
needed

200
Suitable for single-sided flat color code

596
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

201

Four flat weave intarsia color code + yarn feeder number
216

201
Before the big eyes
202
Rough after the front tuck
203
2 paragraphs after the front
204
After the first paragraph of the second paragraph
205
False needle
206
Pre-dummy needle

220
2 pieces of tuck after the front tuck
221
Tail in front of the second paragraph
222
Pre-weaving
223
Front coarse
224 Turn the needle to the back, do not weave, turn the needle to
the front
225 Turn the needle to the front, do not weave, turn the needle to
the back
226 Turn the needle to the back, then weave, turn the needle to the
front
227 Turn the needle to the front, front weave, turn the needle to
the back
228 Front weaving, shifting the needle 5 turns to the left and then
turning the needle to the front
229 Front weaving, shifting the needle 6 turns to the left and then
turning the needle to the front
230 Front weaving, shifting the needle 7 turns to the left and then
turning the needle to the front
231 Front weaving, shifting the needle 5 points to the right and
then turning the needle to the front position
232 Front weaving, shifting 6 needles to the right and then turning
the needles to the front

597
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

233 Front weaving, shifting the needle 7 points to the right and
then turning the needle to the front position
234 After weaving, move the needle 5 turns to the left and then
turn the needle to the front and then turn the needle to the
rear.
235 After weaving, shift 6 needles to the left and then turn the
needles to the front.
236 After weaving, move the needle 7 turns to the left and then
turn the needle to the front and then turn the needle to the
rear.
237 After weaving, shift the needle 5 points to the right and then
turn the needle to the front position.
238 After weaving, shift 6 needles to the right and then turn the
needles to the front.
239 After weaving, shift the needle 7 points to the right and then
turn the needle to the front position.
240
Four flat knitting + front falling cloth
241
Four flat knitting + rear falling cloth
244
Front sling
245
Rear sling
246
Front weaving
247
Weaving in front of the second paragraph
248
Front and rear tucks
249
Falling back and forth
250
Pressing the needle before falling
251
Falling before the needle is pressed
252
Take the left color code action

253
Take the right color code action

598
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

19. Frequently Asked Questions faq


Q: "Folder path My Pictures contains invalid characters" appears during
installation!
A: 1. Open the registry "Start (run (regedit)"
2. Find all registry entries "My Pictures"
3. If there is another drive letter pointing to the d drive, please change it back to
the correct path of the c drive.
For example, "C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\My Documents\My
Pictures".

q: “ ” appears during
installation!
A: Please uninstall and install again.

q: “ ” appears during
installation!
a: Please turn off 360 and other anti-virus software to exit.

q: “ ” appears at
runtime!
A: Run the "VC_redist.x86.exe" runtime under the installation directory.
599
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Q: " " appears when


"VC_redist.x86.exe" is installed!
A: 1. Win7 needs to be upgraded to SP1.
2, win xp need to upgrade to sp3.

q: Found " " after


installation!
a: Once again, there is no Trojan, it is recommended to close the anti-virus software
or join the trust list.

Q:Runtime Error occurs after installation!


A: 1. Install "Start (all programs (Hengqiang New Generation Plate System
(Database Engine)".
2. Install a genuine, full version of the operating system.

600
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Q:“ ” appears after


installation!
A: Installation "Start (all programs (Hengqiang next generation plate system
(database engine).

Q:The error "Library is not registered" appears at runtime.


A: Please delete the mp4 file in the plate system installation directory.

Q:After the system is running, prompt for the registration code, how can I get the
registration code?
A: 1. Contact us and need to provide information about the machine manufacturer.
2. Obtain the registration code through SMS, this SMS does not charge
information fee (communication fee is self-care).

Q:How can I not open the manual? Or the manual is garbled after opening.
A: Please install the pdf reader yourself and download it online.

Q:How to upgrade the system?


A: 1. Run "Help (online upgrade) to automatically upgrade.
2. Go to "Help (on the (Download Center) page, download the appropriate
installation package as needed, and reinstall it.

Q:The upgrade interface prompts "There is a new version, please export the
template and then continue [Download]", where to export the template, and how
to export the template?
a: Right-click on the template in the context menu (Custom (Other) has an export
button.

Q:What new features have been added after the upgrade?


A: Check out the related introduction in Help (Update History).

Q:What is the matter after running the card?


A: 1. "Advanced (Settings (Advanced (check for new version), remove the check.
2. "Advanced (Settings (Advanced (Enable Anomaly Recovery), remove the
check.

601
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

3. Set the Background View to None.

Q:When the model is created, the model selection dialog box does not appear,
but the system is directly exited.
A: "Advanced (Settings (Advanced (No machine type selected), remove the check.

q: “Machine type error” is displayed when creating new.


A: "Advanced (Settings (Advanced (No machine type selected), remove the check.

Q:How can I open the picasso pattern?


A: First create a new panel, then execute the "File (Import) function to import the
picasso pattern.

Q:Why is the import timeline "Function Line Graphic Wrong"?


A: Please confirm whether the pattern to be imported is a picasso 1.0 pattern.
Other versions of the pattern cannot be imported into the function line.

Q:My drawing tools and workspace are gone, what should I do?
A: Tick ​ ​ the View (Toolbar (Drawing Tools/Workspaces).

Q: Why is the graphic I filled out 1x1?


A: "Advanced (Settings (brush brush (rectangle), set the brush type to solid.

q: Why isn't the complete picture displayed after pasting and drawing?

A: 1. Check if the paste switch is on “All Colors”.


2. Check if there is a color code in the Color Mask.
3. Check if there is a relevant color code in "Color Selection".

Q:Can I copy and paste the function line?


A: can.The only requirement is to click on the function line area before pasting and
then click the paste icon in the toolbar to achieve it.

Q:How can the copied pattern not be pasted by other drawing tools?
A: Please use the "right click (copy to (paste board) function to copy it.

Q:Why did I not mirror the pattern after I selected the "Horizontal Mirror" tool?
A: You also need to click the mouse in the mirrored area.

Q:Why didn't the tool be selected or clicked?


A: Try to draw a selection box first, and some tools require you to select the range
first.

Q:How to set the number of inserted lines?

602
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

A: 1. "Right button (Settings (Painting) can enter the setting interface.


2. "Advanced (Settings (Drawing) can enter the setting interface.
3. If you do not draw a selection box, right-click to select the Insert Line tool to
enter the settings interface.
4. It can also be set by the shortcut key "Ctrl + number key".

Q:How to modify the shortcut keys?


A: 1. In the "Advanced (Settings (shortcuts) interface can be set, can only be a letter
a ~ z letter, you need to restart the plate making system, the settings can work.
2. After setting, please export the settings to the shortcut file for recovery after
the next system upgrade.

Q:Why can't I choose a color shortcut?


A: This is because the system automatically switches to the previous drawing tool
after selecting the color of the mouse point. In fact, the current color has already
been selected.

Q:Can I fix 20 color codes per page?


A: can.Set in Advanced (Settings (Advanced (number of colors per page).

Q:Can I import pictures taken by the camera?


A: can.After the right button (select the jpg file type in the template (file), you can
import the photo file. At this time, you can also perform the corresponding
processing of jacquard color change through the multi-value conversion function
above.

Q:Can the pattern be saved automatically?


A: can.In the advanced (Settings (Advanced (Automatically save interval (minutes)"
setting, 0 means not to save automatically.

Q:At compile time, "Exceeded the maximum number of stitches in the flat
knitting machine" is displayed.
A: First confirm whether the machine is a single system machine of jacquard
attachment type, otherwise you can remove the "Advanced (Settings before the flat
machine (check before compiling)".

q: Why does the prompt "Cannot appear weaving and tucking on the same line"
when compiling?
A: 1. Advanced (Settings (horizontal machine) (check before compiling, remove the
hook.
2. Or change the h1-1 model to h1-2 or h1-3.

Q:After the small picture pattern is compiled, the pat part corresponding to the
color code of the small picture is empty.

603
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

A: Tick ​ ​ the Flat Knife (Template (Save Expanded File).

Q:The process order always reports "Neutral needle mismatch".


A: Click the "Check" button to fill the left and right needles in the inspection
window into the craft sheet.

q: After the small picture is expanded, what should I do?


A: 1. Undo one step and return to the original pattern.The expansion function just
shows you the effect of the small image.
2. Save and save the pattern with the thumbnail.

Q:How to enter the craft order with the needle over the center line?
A: Please enter the starting stitch offset until the white center line in the preview is
adjusted to the inside of the preview, that is, the left and left needles in the “check”
result are all greater than zero.

Q:Why is the preview of the craft order correct, but the collar part is not out?
A: Please confirm that the number of needles in the collar process is positive.

Q:How is the craft list not hoisted in the oblique shoulder?


A: 1. Set the cotton yarn mark, and the tangle will be generated above the cotton
yarn;
2. The rib area should be set to "normal weave".

Q:Why is there a "serious warning: please check the end line! (empty page)"
message after compiling, does it matter?
A: It's ok.The system simply indicates that when the pattern line ends, the machine
head does not return to the original position, and the system automatically inserts an
empty page to bring the machine head back.

Q: How to deal with 1x1 patterns?


A: 1. Draw a normal pattern;
2. When compiling, tick the option "1x1 Transform".

Q: Why is the pin header changed to 1x1 after the pattern is compiled?
A: Uncheck the "1x1 Transform" in the compile option.

q: Why is the backstage of the jacquard not the backstage required in the 214
function line?
A: Please empty the contents of the Jacquard Organization Chart.

q: Why is the back of the bag (deer) not good?


A: The effect of the bag (deer) on the sesame spot is not ideal, please try to change
to the grid.

604
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

q: After compiling, the flower version is wrong, please contact us. What should I
do?
A: Please send the pattern to our service staff for inspection.

q: After compiling, "The yarn feeder is not completely yarned out", what should I
do?
A: 1, please determine whether it is the bottom plate pattern, non-starting floor
can be ignored;
2. The bottom plate pattern needs to be spun out through the yarn output
function line.

q: Why can the small image be expanded in the module expansion, but the
simulation does not see the action of the small image?
A: 1, must be compiled in the plate making system;
2. "Save expansion file" must be ticked.

Q:Why can't I see the file on the machine?


a: The file name of the new generation plate system is suffixed as hcd and cannot be
used on older versions of the machine.

Q:Which machine should the hcd file be used on?


A: 1. To use the hcd file, you must upgrade the electronic control to the new
version.
2. The specific upgrade package of the electronic control is provided by the
manufacturer of the flat knitting machine according to different models of the
machine.

Q:Can the previous machine files still be used?


a: Yes.The new generation of plate-making systems provides conversion capabilities
to convert cnt files to hcd files.

Q:What types of files can be converted?


A: 1. At present, the new generation of plate-making system can convert cnt, 000,
001 and other files into hcd files.
2. More machine files will be converted to hcd files in the future.

Q:What are the characteristics of the new generation of plate making system?
A: 1. Support 16 yarn feeders, which is more convenient to use and can weave
more complicated patterns.
2. The yarn feeder automatically follows, ensuring that the yarn feeder is in a
safe and suitable position, and the yarn feeder can be automatically processed to
prevent the yarn feeder from being caught.

605
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

3, automatically adapt to the number of jacquard colors, support for higher


multi-color jacquard.
4, fully automatic processing of irregular jacquard, can automatically support a
variety of ways of single-sided jacquard, jacquard to single-sided, and a row of
jacquard.
5, support inlaid float line, you can insert cross-floating line in the inlay, and
maximize the optimization of the weaving efficiency of the intarsia.
6. Support the yarn feeder knotting, knotting according to the position of the
yarn feeder at the edge of the corresponding pattern, greatly improving the plate
making efficiency of the color pattern.
7, support for shrinking needle processing, can achieve dozens of needles shrink
needles at one time.
8. Estimate the weaving time. After the compilation is successful, the proofing
time can be automatically estimated.
9. Automatically optimize the stroke, according to the knitting condition of the
pattern, adopt the appropriate weaving system to save the knitting time.
10, support segmentation, support multi-segment variability control in a row on
a high-speed motor.
11, the new machine file, only one file on the machine, saving storage space.
12. Synchronous working parameters, the machine working parameters can be
set at the same time of plate making.
13. Support intarsia yarn feeder, intarsia yarn feeder can achieve higher weaving
efficiency.
14. Improve plate making efficiency. For some complicated patterns such as
intarsia and jacquard, the pattern can be quickly completed, the plate making
efficiency is increased by orders of magnitude, and the pattern design can hardly be
made before completion.
15, 3d simulation effect, you can intuitively display the sample effect without
proofing.

q: Can a new generation of machine files be converted to cnt?


a: Yes."Compile option (high-level (compiled as cnt), tick.

Q:Can it be used in a single system machine?


A: can.
1. It is necessary to set the “lock left system” of the yarn feeder (1) function line.
2, or choose a single system model is also available.

Q:When the simulation shows that there may be an error, how do I know where
it happened?
A: 1. In the simulation interface, you can do this through the “Next Error” function
in the right-click menu.
2. At present, it is possible to simulate the situation in which the yarn feeder hits
the needle.

606
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Q:What is a fake needle?


A: Similar to the way of lifting the needle, but not the position of the hanging, so
can not eat the line, play the role of holding the coil, do not let the coil float.

Q:Can fake needles, two-stage needles, special needles, tight knitting, etc. be
used?
A: Because these functions require a corresponding triangle to be used, it is not
possible to use personnel who need to consult a specific machine manufacturer.

Q:What is the use of the color code?


a: The coil can be loosened, which is convenient for turning the needle and
alleviating the situation that the needle turning speed is high and the needle is
leaking.Make the pattern more stable.

Q:How to convert to 16 yarn feeder patterns of 960 and previous versions?


a: After uploading the file, you can download the file in 960.
Note: You need to modify the translation and offset values ​ ​ in the 201
function line.

Q:How to convert to 8 yarn feeder patterns in 950 and previous versions?


a: First refer to the previous question, after converting to the 960 pattern, you can
save it as a tpf file through the small image, and then import it in 950.

607
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Precautions for converting the Appendix 000 file to the


hcd file

1. First, you must select a specific machine type before making a pattern, as shown
below.

2. Select the ses122s machine type, as shown below

608
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

The three systems need to choose the ses123s model.

609
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

3. Do not choose to compress data when generating action files

4. Open Hengqiang new generation plate making, choose to convert to hcd file

5. After opening, you can choose to convert to a single file, or convert to a folder
directory.
610
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Select the file as shown below


Select the 000 files that need to be converted

Select the directory folder as shown below


Directly select a folder to place 000 files, you can convert multiple files at the
same time

611
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

6. Select the parameters later, as shown below


The parameters can be selected as default. If you need to change, please set it
yourself.

 1 Allow the use of the split sand spout


 2 filter system extra blank line
 3 Check if there is an illegal sand mouth
 4 export sand mouth information file
 5 In the case of allowing No. 18 sand mouth, replace the split sand mouth, 0
represents the default No. 18 sand mouth
 6 None: does not generate the bottoming method, generated by the lower
computer; 000: the original method of generating the original pattern; system:
612
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

generate the system default starting method

Select OK after setting is complete


Note: 1-5 is generally not selected by default, 6 selects 000 mode

7. When the conversion error occurs, you can send us the information such as 000
file, conversion parameters, error code, contact information, etc., so that we can
find the reason and feedback in time.

The above is the import option precautions. After converting the hcd file, you can run
it directly on the machine.
You can choose to import the cnt tool to import the 000 file, directly import the
current file, and achieve the decompilation effect.As shown below

Import effect

613
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

At this point, the imported pattern can be inspected, and local pattern and function
line parameters can be modified.After the modification is completed, save and
compile, and then use the compiled machine file hcd on the machine.
The above are two common methods for uploading files to 000 rpm hcd.
Because there is a difference in the theoretical drawing between the island
refinement version and the constant compulsory version, it is recommended to
modify the drawing method according to the rules of the constant compulsory
version when using the island refinement version. : For example, the scissors clip part,
try not to use the automatic scissors clip, manually specify each clip will be better.Do
not use the No. 18 sand mouth when using only one rubber band No. 8.
For other details, please pay attention to the timely modification during use.

614
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Appendix II Notes on converting sin files to hcd files

In order not to affect the normal use of the stoll pattern, it is recommended to
save the stoll pattern to a separate folder before converting.
1. M1 plate drawing and compilation notes
M1 selects 320tc for the machine type when compiling the pattern, do not use
npj (variable coil length), do not combine different traverse shaker actions.

The following is best set according to the parameters in the red box selection
range.

615
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

When setting the f4 sand mouth area, it is recommended to set all sand
sprinklers to the left.

Need to get the file on the machine as .sin .jac .set

616
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

As shown below

2. Use the import cnt function after opening the constant mandatory
version of the software.
parameter settings
Bottom selection filter blank line

Non-bottom version chooses to filter empty lines, end falling, bottoming

617
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Import after selecting sin file

Import preview

3. Make local modifications after saving


Modify 1: The bottom part, delete the bottom part.

618
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

After deletion

Modification 2: The bottom plate machine needs to manually set the clip
scissors action.No bottom plate machine type does not need to modify the
bottom scissors clip and other actions.
Then check the degree of the paragraph, as well as the sand mouth.Can
be modified according to their own habits.
The following should be set according to the specific pattern.
Set the clip to take off about 40 lines.

Set the No. 1 clip line (elastic) No. 1 scissors about 80 lines.

At the end of the end, the yarn feeder yarn is set, and the 2nd clip scissors
act.Yarn output can only be set in the current line of the sand mouth action.

619
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Note: The specific modifications are modified according to the machine


type and weaving principle.
Can modify some sand mouth and degree segments

4. Compile and simulate after modification

5. Compile the simulation: you can go to the machine without prompting


the error message.

620
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

621
Hengqiang new generation plate making system instruction manual

Zhejiang Hengqiang Technology Co., Ltd.


Zhejiang hengqiang Electronics Technology Holdings co.,Ltd.

Add: No. 6, Xianxing Road, Xianlin Town, Yuhang District, Hangzhou,

Zhejiang, China

TEL: 0086-571-88684666

FAX: 0086-571-88684918

WEB: Http://www.hqcnc.cn

Email: [email protected]

The final interpretation of the use of this plate making system belongs to

Zhejiang Hengqiang Technology Co., Ltd.

622

You might also like